Quarterlytics / Residential Construction / The Berkeley Group

The Berkeley Group

bkg · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker bkg
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Residential Construction
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2013 Annual Report · The Berkeley Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
BACK COVER

SPINE
8.5mm

FRONT COVER

Annual Report 2013
 

l

B
e
r
k
e
e
y
G
r
o
u
p
A
n
n
u
a
l

R
e
p
o
r
t
2
0
1
2

The Berkeley Group Holdings plc
Berkeley House
19 Portsmouth Road
Cobham
Surrey KT11 1JG
UK

T  +44 (0)1932 868555
F  +44 (0)1932 868 667
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk

Design by Hunter Design

Printed in England by Crystal
This report is printed on EBB Chromomat

9597_001_RA_2013_Cover_AW.indd   1-3

Our vision
for the future

SPINE
8.5mm

22/07/2013   14:37

 
 
 
 
INSIDE FRONT

SPINE
8.5mm

INSIDE BACK

CONTENTS 

Highlights 

Financials	 

About this report 

1  Who We Are and What We Do 
2  Business Performance 
3  Chairman’s Statement 
4  Running a Sustainable Business 
5  Managing Director’s Statement 

86 	

Independent Auditors’ report on the 
consolidated financial statements 

87	  Consolidated income statement 
Consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income 
88	  Consolidated statement of 

Building Homes for Everyone 

financial position 

6  Building Homes for Everyone 

Running a Sustainable Business 

22  Running a Sustainable Business 

Trading And Financial Review 

41  Trading Review 
47  Financial Review 
52  Berkeley’s Principal Operating Risks 

Governance 

56  Board of Directors 
58  Directors’ Report 
61  Remuneration Report 
78  Corporate Governance Report 

89	  Consolidated statement of changes 

in equity 

90  Consolidated cash flow statement 
91  Notes to the consolidated financial 

statements 

110  Independent Auditors’ report on  
the Company financial statements 

111	  Company balance sheet 
112	

	 Notes to the Company financial 

statements 

115  Five year summary 
116	

	 Financial diary, registered office 

and advisors 

Welcome to the Annual Report of The 
Berkeley Group Holdings plc (“the Berkeley 
Group” or “Berkeley”), a publicly owned 
company, listed on the London Stock 
Exchange within the FTSE 250. In this 
report, we give an overview of Berkeley’s 
performance this year in the Highlights 
section followed by a showcase of our 
portfolio of developments in London and 
the South of England in Building Homes for 
Everyone, before explaining how we operate 
in Running a Sustainable Business and a 
review of the year in our Trading and Financial 
Review. Our Governance section and the 
detailed Financials accompanied by a report 
from the Group’s auditors, complete the 
Annual Report. 

This page: Fulham Reach, Hammersmith 
Cover: Beaufort Park, Hendon 

This image is computer 
generated and indicative only. 

9597_001_RA_2013_Cover_AW.indd   4-6

SPINE
8.5mm

One Blackfriars

This image is computer
generated and indicative only.

22/07/2013   14:37

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
   
 
   
 
  
  
WHO WE ARE AND WHAT WE DO
 

The Berkeley Group Holdings plc 
(“Berkeley”) is a developer of residential-
led, mixed-use schemes, with a history of 
creating successful, sustainable places. 

Berkeley builds homes and 
neighbourhoods in its core markets of 
London and the South of England where 
its knowledge, expertise and proven track 
record, with over thirty years of experience 
in this market, gives it an unrivalled ability 
to deliver new homes and communities. 

Berkeley will continue to forward sell 
its developments wherever possible, 
maintaining a strong balance sheet and 
keeping financial risk low in order to 
mitigate the operating risks of delivery 
and carefully allocating capital to the 
right projects at the right time, matching 
supply to demand wherever it can. 

Highlights 
HIGHLIGHTS 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

Proud to be a member of the Berkeley Group of Companies 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   1

22/07/2013   15:20

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

1 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HIGHLIGHTS 

BUSINESS PERFORMANCE
 

This year’s performance is a direct result of 
a period of sustained investment since early 
2009 during which we have committed over 
£1.0 billion to new land and £2.4 billion to 
construction, delivering over 12,000 new 
homes in London and the South of England. 

Profit before tax 
£270.7 million 

Earnings per share 
160.0 pence 

2010 

2011 

2012 

2013 

£110.3m 

£136.2m 

£214.8m 

£270.7m 

60.0p 

72.1p 

2010 

2011 

2012 

2013 

121.0p 

160.0p 

Return on equity 
22.4% 

2010 

2011 

2012 

2013 

13.3% 

15.3% 

21.2% 

22.4% 

Net asset value per share 
1,009 pence 

2010 

2011 

2012 

2013 

637p 

709p 

839p 

1,009p 

Cash due on forward sales 
£1,453 million 

2010 

2011 

2012 

2013 

£648m 

£814m 

£1,056m 

£1,453m 

Land bank estimated future gross margin 
£2,852 million 

2010 

2011 

2012 

2013 

£2,038m 

£2,304m 

£2,580m 

£2,852m 

2     

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   2

22/07/2013   15:20

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT
 

“I am delighted to report a strong set of results 
which underline the benefit of a strategy aligned 
with a cyclical market. A combination of 32% growth 
in earnings in the year, an increase in cash due on 
forward sales to over £1.4 billion and continued 
growth of the land bank means that Berkeley 
remains on track to meet the first £568 million 
milestone payment by September 2015 under its 
ten year plan to return £1.7 billion to shareholders. 

In this context, I am pleased to report that the 
Board has declared a further interim dividend of 
59 pence per share, payable in September 2013, 
which will count towards the first return and follows 
the payment of an interim dividend of 15 pence 
per share in April 2013. 

The growth in earnings this year is a direct result 
of a period of sustained investment since early 
2009 during which Berkeley has committed 
over £1 billion to new land and £2.4 billion to 
construction and completed over 12,000 new 
homes in London and the South of England. This 
investment has enabled us to regenerate derelict 
sites across the region, sustaining 16,000 jobs

through increased activity and committing some

£250 million towards crucial local infrastructure

improvements including schools, surgeries, parks

and playgrounds. An increasing supply of new and

affordable homes is crucial to supporting economic 
recovery and needs inward investment to support 
and finance this. London in particular must remain 
competitive on a global scale because it can and 
does attract investment from around the world and 
it is this investment which finances the provision of 
new homes of every tenure and in every price range. 

Throughout this period of sustained growth, 
Berkeley has remained aware that it needs to 
balance its aims to be successful and sustainable 
with a social purpose. The challenges of creating 
exceptional places have given us a unique insight 
into how a company can create economic value 
in a way that also creates value for society. We 
understand that the pursuit of a “shared value” 

must be central to the way we operate, and we 
have sought to build partnerships, create jobs and 
engage better with local communities across all 
of the business. In addition, through the Berkeley 
Foundation, we have now committed nearly 
£3 million to more than 40 charities since 2011 and 
delivered new jobs and skills training, helping tackle 
important issues such as homelessness. I want to 
ensure that Berkeley embraces its role to build 
trust and empathy with its stakeholders and the 
wider community and helps create employment 
opportunities for those who most need it. 

I am delighted with the contribution of our 
workforce to this year’s strong performance. 
Berkeley’s success is a direct result of the passion 
and dedication shown by all of our employees and 
I would like to take this opportunity to thank them 
for this. Their loyalty and hard work, across every 
site and every discipline, is the driving force 
behind the business and gives the company the 
stability and expertise which makes it strong. 

In terms of the Board, I am pleased to announce 
that Adrian Li will join the Company as a 
Non-executive Director with effect from the Annual 
General Meeting. Adrian is currently the Deputy 
Chief Executive of The Bank of East Asia Limited. 
Alan Coppin has announced his intention to step 
down as a Non-executive Director at the Annual 
General Meeting on 2 September 2013, having 
served on the Board since 2006. I would like to 
thank Alan for his contribution to the Company 
and welcome Adrian to the Board. 

We have positioned Berkeley with a clear, 
sustainable long-term plan. I am confident that 
Berkeley can meet its objectives for delivering 
returns to shareholders, but mindful of the risks 
that geopolitical events, regulation, increases in 
taxation alongside an uncertain future tax policy 
and even anti-competitive rhetoric can have on 
the business and the wider housing market.” 

Tony Pidgley CBE
Chairman 

“We have positioned Berkeley with 
a clear, sustainable long-term plan” 

HIGHLIGHTS 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

3 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 










 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HIGHLIGHTS 

RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS
 

Berkeley’s business is run with long-term 
sustainable success at its heart, from its corporate 
strategy and commitments to shareholders, to the 
framework and objectives set for its people across 
every discipline of the business. An integrated 
business strategy is essential to achieve this. 

Running a sustainable business 
Remaining one of the most successful and sustainable businesses in Britain 

Operations 

Homes 

Places 

Customers 

Running our business 
efficiently and considerately
and working with our
supply chain 

Developing high
quality, well-designed 
homes with low 
environmental impact 

Creating great places
where people enjoy a good
quality of life, now and
in the future 

Providing exceptional service
to our customers throughout
the purchasing process
and after completion 

Our people 
Retaining a highly skilled and passionate workforce who work in a safe and 
supportive environment and help us to contribute to wider society 

Considerate 
construction 

35.9/40 

(2012: 35.7)
Average Considerate
Constructors Scheme score 
(May to December 2012) 

Environmental 
performance 

100% 

Percentage of new homes
to be certified to at least 
Code for Sustainable 
Homes Level 3 

Contribution 
to communities 

£245m 

S106 contributions over 
the last five years 

Customer 
satisfaction 

98% 

(2012: 97%)
Percentage of customers
that would recommend 
us to a friend 

Safe working 

2.99 

Supporting training 

115 

Accident Incident Rate per 1,000 employees
and operatives (2012: 2.69) 

Number of apprentices who
worked on our sites in 2012 

4     

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   4

22/07/2013   15:20

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
MANAGING DIRECTOR’S STATEMENT
 

Our aim is to run the business in a safe and 
sustainable way, minimising financial risks where 
we can and seeking to create homes and vibrant 
neighbourhoods of exceptional quality in 
partnership with local communities. Berkeley builds 
homes for everyone, from first-time buyers to those 
moving house, for people young and old, from 
prime London locations to large scale regeneration 
schemes and small communities near market towns, 
whether new build or the restoration of heritage 
buildings. In doing so we put our customers at the 
heart of each and every decision and aim to create 
amazing places that will stand the test of time. 

Looking to the future, and with the land bank now 
in place, the intention is to deliver strong and 
consistent returns on equity whilst maintaining the 
value in the land bank. This approach respects the 
fact that the property market is cyclical and that 
there are continuing barriers to accelerating the 
delivery of new housing. By operating at a natural 
size with a market-leading brand and adding value 
in every area of the business, Berkeley can maintain 
the flexibility to react to changes in the market, 
invest opportunistically in the right locations at the 
right time or return surplus cash to shareholders.” 

Rob Perrins 
Managing Director 

“The growth in basic earnings per share by 32.2% 
to 160.0 pence in the year is a direct result of 
sustained investment in the Berkeley business 
over several years. Pre-tax profits are up 26.0% to 
£270.7 million and return on shareholders’ equity, 
a core performance measure, is up from 21.2% 
to 22.4%. 

In a year of continued expansion, Berkeley 
committed £315 million to acquire ten new sites 
and, with 73 of its 87 sites now in construction, has 
increased its net investment in work in progress, 
after taking account of the delivery of projects in 
the year, by some £289 million which underpins 
the Group’s ability to generate future earnings. 

Strong cash generation meant that, despite this 
investment and paying £19.7 million of dividends to 
shareholders in April 2013, Berkeley ended the year 
ungeared with net cash of £44.7 million, having 
started the year with net debt of £57.9 million. Cash 
due on forward sales of over £1,452.8 million, an 
increase of £397.1 million this year, supports our 
continued investment and provides good visibility 
over future performance. 

Berkeley has agreed a long-term strategic plan 
with shareholders to return £1.7 billion in cash by 
meeting three milestone payments of £568 million 
in 2015, and £567 million in 2018 and 2021. Key 
to the Group’s ability to meet these milestones is 
the underlying quality of the land bank. Having 
increased the estimated gross margin in the land 
bank by £272 million to £2,852 million this year, 
Berkeley is currently on course to outperform its 
short-term target to deliver the first milestone 
payment of £568 million by 30 September 2015 
from retained earnings. Additionally, planning 
successes in the year mean that the land bank is 
currently in place from which to meet both the 
first and second milestones, some £1.14 billion 
in cash in total. 

“With the land bank now in place, the 
intention is to deliver strong and consistent 
returns on equity whilst maintaining value 
in the land bank” 

HIGHLIGHTS 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

5 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Edenbrook, Fleet 

6  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   6

22/07/2013   15:20

BUILDING HOMES 
FOR EVERYONE 

Our developments range in size from 
a few homes near market towns to 
complex, mixed-use urban regeneration 
schemes of over 4,000 homes including 
multi-million pound restoration projects, 
schools, community centres, student 
accommodation and senior living homes, 
all built with safety, sustainability and  
quality at their heart. 

Heritage 

Regeneration 

Family 

First time homes 

Luxury 

Affordable 

City living 

New communities 

Student 

Senior living 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   7

22/07/2013   15:20

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

7 

 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

HERITAGE
 

Preserving Britain’s architectural heritage for future 
generations is at the heart of placemaking today. 

1  |  Roehampton House at Queen Mary’s Place, Roehampton 

The painstaking renovation of this elegant Grade 1 listed property, originally 
designed in 1712, into 24 luxury apartments is now complete. 

2  |  75 Leman Street, Aldgate 

3  |  Roman House, City of London 

An elegant Edwardian building with high ceilings, 
large arched windows and a grand central staircase 
is being restored and converted into 59 prestigious 
new residences. 

A landmark building of 90 luxurious apartments in the 
City of London, overlooking the St Alphage gardens 
and the original piece of Roman Wall which is adjacent 
to the development. 

Image shown is computer generated and indicative only. 

8     

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   8

22/07/2013   15:20

 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
REGENERATION
 

Successful regeneration brings jobs, investment 
and a higher quality of life to the places created. 

1  |  Kidbrooke Village 

Working in partnership with the Royal Borough of Greenwich, the Homes and Communities Agency and 
Southern Housing Group, Kidbrooke Village is seeing the transformation of a 109 hectare brownfield site 
into a vibrant new community providing over 4,000 new homes. 

BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

2  |  Woodberry Park 

3  |  Riverlight, Nine Elms 

One of the UK’s largest estate redevelopment 
projects, 700 new homes have already been 
delivered at Woodberry Park. Some 4,600 new 
homes will eventually be developed alongside 
a range of new community facilities. 

This Rogers Stirk Harbour + Partners designed 
scheme will provide some 800 new homes and 
amenities, with over 60% of the scheme dedicated 
to open space, in the first major development in the 
Nine Elms regeneration area on London’s South Bank. 

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

Image shown is computer generated and indicative only. 

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   9

22/07/2013   15:21

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

FAMILY
 

Creating appealing family homes with modern 
designs in safe, vibrant neighbourhoods. 

1  |  Edenbrook, Fleet 

A development of three, four and five bedroom family homes in a country 
park setting opening up 84 acres of new parkland to the community. 

2  |  Thornchace, Guildford 

3  |  Lime Grove Mews, Hammersmith 

A collection of seven new five bedroom family homes 
close to Guildford and designed with Arts and Crafts 
style architecture. 

A terrace of 19 four and five bedroom family homes 
and 50 apartments in the heart of West London. 

10  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   10

22/07/2013   15:21

 
 
  
 
 
  
FIRST TIME HOMES
 

Giving a new generation the opportunity 
to secure a high quality new home. 

1  |  Beaufort Park, Hendon 

The regeneration of a 25 acre former RAF site in Hendon into a mixed-use 
development of over 3,000 new homes at every affordability level. 

BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

2  |  Chelsea Creek, Fulham 

3  |  Royal Arsenal Riverside,Woolwich 

The creation of this dockside development of over 
800 new homes has provided the opportunity for 
first-time buyers living in the London Borough 
of Hammersmith and Fulham to access high 
specification apartments at affordable prices. 

The regeneration and restoration of the historic Royal 
Arsenal to provide over 4,000 new homes has provided 
opportunities for people to enter the property market, 
benefiting from the availability of Government FirstBuy 
and NewBuy schemes. 

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   11

22/07/2013   15:21

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

11 

 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

LUXURY
 

Berkeley is proud of its reputation for delivering 
luxury homes to the top end of the market. 

1  |  Ebury Square, Belgravia 

Designed by Squire & Partners, Ebury Square is a development of 71 exclusive 
apartments overlooking a garden square in the heart of London’s Belgravia. 

Image shown is computer generated and indicative only. 

2  |  The Tower, One St George Wharf 

3  |  190 Strand 

The Tower will be one of Europe’s tallest residential 
towers at 50 storeys and will provide luxury living 
and uninterrupted views across London. 

190 Strand will be a luxurious development of 
some 200 apartments and penthouses in the 
heart of central London. 

Image shown is computer generated and indicative only. 

12  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   12

22/07/2013   15:21

 
 
 
 
 
 
AFFORDABLE
 

Berkeley provides good quality, contemporary 
affordable housing of all tenures across London 
and the South. 

1  |  Woodberry Park 

At Woodberry Park, a large-scale redevelopment project of some 4,600 new homes overall, this year 
Berkeley delivered 278 affordable homes. 

BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

2  |  Battersea Reach 

3  |  Queens Acre, Beaconsfield 

A riverside development of over 1,300 new homes 
in the heart of Wandsworth, at which this year 
St George completed 65 affordable homes. 

This year we completed 17 affordable homes 
in Beaconsfield. 

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   13

22/07/2013   15:21

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

13 

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

CITY LIVING
 

Aspirational homes in accessible locations are 
needed to support a growing, world-class economy. 

1  |  Langham Square, Putney 

A collection of 104 two and three bedroom apartments in vibrant Putney, adjacent to 
the Underground station and with easy access to central London and to local amenities. 

Image shown is computer generated and indicative only. 

2  |  Caspian Wharf, Limehouse 

3  |  Cambridge Riverside 

A waterside development of over 500 apartments 
in Limehouse with easy access to Canary Wharf, 
the City and the Olympic Park in Stratford, which is 
now complete. 

A riverside development of some 200 homes in the 
heart of the university city of Cambridge, convenient 
for the technology hub of the city and commutable 
to London. 

14  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   14

22/07/2013   15:21

  
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
NEW COMMUNITIES
 

Great places will establish new communities which 
will enhance the quality of life of their residents. 

1  |  Holborough Lakes 

A new community of over 1,000 new homes with New England and traditional craft 
architecture, located in rural Kent and set around a series of tranquil lakes. 

BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

2  |  Ryewood, Sevenoaks 

3  |  Highwood, Horsham 

A brand new community of some 500 homes situated 
adjacent to the Sevenoaks Wildlife Reserve, in close 
proximity to the amenities of Sevenoaks in Kent, 
including direct trains into London. 

Berkeley is creating a classic English village with 
tree-lined avenues, a square and a village pond 
on the edge of the market town of Horsham in 
West Sussex. 

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   15

22/07/2013   15:21

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

15 

 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

STUDENT
 

Britain’s world-class educational establishments demand 
world-class accommodation for their students. 

1  |  Costume Store, Acton 

A development of 730 bedrooms in North Acton for the undergraduate 
students of University of the Arts London, which opened in September 2012. 

2  |  Griffon Studios, Clapham 

3  |  Goodman’s Fields, Aldgate 

A development 566 studios for postgraduate students 
of Imperial College London, the scheme was delivered 
in phases, opened in September 2011 and completed 
in September 2012. 

A new landmark undergraduate scheme due for 
completion in September 2013, this development 
will provide 617 bedrooms for students in London. 

16  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   16

22/07/2013   15:21

  
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
SENIOR LIVING
 

Berkeley’s developments provide high quality affordable 
accommodation for people in all walks of life. 

1  |  Dickens Yard, Ealing 

This mixed-use development in Ealing includes a pioneering new initiative to deliver homes for the 
active elderly wishing to downsize, thereby tackling under occupation in existing family housing stock. 

BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

2  |  Victory Pier, Gillingham 

3  |  Kingshill Meadow, Cirencester 

Prospect Place at Victory Pier includes 60 specialist 
apartments for the elderly with on-site facilities in 
the wider setting of this mixed-use waterfront 
development in Kent. 

A development of two, three and four bedroom 
homes in the heart of the Cotswolds, Kingshill 
Meadow includes 61 specialist apartments 
for the elderly with on-site staff and facilities. 

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   17

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

17 

 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

OUR DEVELOPMENTS
 

Berkeley builds new homes and 
neighbourhoods in the markets which 
it knows and understands. With further 
selective purchases this year, Berkeley’s 
sites remain centred on its core markets 
of London… 

37 

5 

8 
6  38 
2 

41 

30 

LONDON 

29 

10 36 19 

21 20 

9 

4 

24 
3  7 

15 

18 

2 

9 

1 

1 

33 
5 

16

13 

3 

8 
28 

27
17 

12 
39 

32 

7 

6 

25 

34 

22 

4 

14 

31 

23 

26

40 
11 

35 

18  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   18

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
 
  
 
BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

2  |  375 Kensington High Street 

12  |  Eastbury House, Albert Embankment 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

15  |  Fulham Reach, Hammersmith 

London 
London Under Construction 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

190 Strand 
375 Kensington High St 
(including Homebase and Telereal) 
Abell & Cleland House, Westminster 
Battersea Reach 
Beaufort Park, Hendon 
Carmelite, Finchley 
Caspian Wharf, Bow 
Chambers Wharf, Southwark 
Chelsea Creek / Imperial Wharf 
Dickens Yard, Ealing 
Durham Road, Wimbledon* 
Eastbury House, Albert Embankment 
Ebury Square, Belgravia 
Emerald Square, Roehampton 
Fulham Reach, Hammersmith 
Goodmans Fields, Aldgate 
Hampton House, Albert Embankment 
Hurlingham Gate, Fulham 

’

Images shown above are computer generated and indicative only. 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

Napier, Acton 
Kew Bridge Road 
Kew Bridge West, Brentford 
Kidbrooke Village 
Langham Square, Putney 
Lime Grove Mews, Hammersmith 
Marine Wharf, Deptford 
Marryat Place, Wimbledon 
One Blackfriars, Southwark 
One Tower Bridge 
One Victoria Road, Acton 
Parkwest, West Drayton 
Queen Mary’s Place, Roehampton 
Riverlight, Battersea 
Roman House, City of London 
Royal Arsenal Riverside 
Saffron Square, Croydon 
Sir Alexander Close, Acton 
Stanmore Place 

38 

39 

40 

41 

The Avenue, Finchley 
The Tower, One St George Wharf 
Wimbledon Hill Park 
Woodberry Park 

London Future Sites 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

City Forum, City of London
 
High Road, Finchley*
 
Hogarth, Chiswick*
 
Latchmere House, Richmond*
 
London Dock, Wapping*
 
South Quay Plaza, Docklands*
 
Sovereign Court, Hammersmith*
 
St Josephs, Mill Hill*
 
Twickenham Sorting Office
 

’

* Sites purchased during the year 

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

19 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   19

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

OUR DEVELOPMENTS
 

… and the South of England.
 

E 

H I R

S

N

CAMBRIDGESHIRE 

W

O

R

C

E

S

T

27 

E

R

S

H

I
R

E

WARWICKSHIRE 

7 

26 

GLOUCESTERSHIRE 

8 

MILTON 
KEYNES 

N O RTH A M P T O

B
U
C

K

I

N

G

H

A

M

S

E
R
HI
S
D
R
O
F
D
E
B

O

F
T
23 

R

E

H

4 

SUFFOLK 

R D S HIRE

ESSEX 

H

I
R

E

14  3 

1 

1 

17 

3 

2 

OXFORDSHIRE 

BERKSHIRE 

20 

WILTSHIRE 

11 

HAMPSHIRE 

2 

LONDON 

19 

9 

24 

10 

22 

SURREY 

16 

6

4 

12 

15 

21 

KENT 

25

5 

WEST SUSSEX 

EAST SUSSEX 

13 

18

20  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   20

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
 
 
1  |  Amersham 

18  |  North Bersted 

14  |  High  Wycombe 

BUILDING HOMES FOR EVERYONE 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

The South
 
South of England Under Construction 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Amersham 
Ascot (2 sites) 
Beaconsfield (2 sites) 
Cambridge 
Canterbury 
Caterham 
Cheltenham (2 sites) 
Cirencester 
Claygate 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

Cobham 
Fleet (2 sites) 
Gillingham 
Gosport 
High Wycombe 
Holborough 
Horsham 
Maidenhead 
North Bersted 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

Oxshott 
Reading 
Sevenoaks 
Shalford 
St Albans 
Tadworth (2 sites) 
Tunbridge Wells 
Woodstock 
Worcester 

South of England Future Sites 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Beaconsfield* 
Gerrards Cross (2 sites) 
Maidenhead* 
Reigate 

* Sites purchased during the year 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   21

22/07/2013   15:22

 BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

21 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Kidbrooke Village 

22  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   22

22/07/2013   15:22

RUNNING A 
SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

Berkeley has an integrated business 
strategy dedicated to securing long-term 
sustainable success, operating in a way 
that contributes positively to society. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   23

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

23 

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS
 

Sustainability is at the heart of Berkeley. This 
is as true in Berkeley’s corporate strategy and 
commitments to shareholders as it is in the day­
to-day running of a business in which our people 
are driven, across every discipline, to deliver  
long-term, sustainable success. 

Berkeley is aware that it needs to balance its aim 
to be successful with a will to operate sustainably 
and with a social purpose. Creating exceptional 
places that stand the test of time is at the forefront 
of this, as is its role in creating new jobs, working 
in partnership with local communities and 
contributing to the communities in and around 
each of its developments. 

Berkeley is respectful of the inherently cyclical 
nature of the property market and is protective 
of the business’s capacity to operate safely, 
sustainably and at an optimal size, now and  
in the future. 

24  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   24

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

Our vision 
for the future

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

Stanmore Place 

What we do 

The Group is focused on its core markets of 
London and the South of England, markets  
in which its knowledge, experience and proven 
track record gives it an unrivalled ability to deliver 
new homes and communities. 

Berkeley’s initial focus is on identifying and 
selectively acquiring the right land, and then 
obtaining viable, implementable planning 
consents appropriate to the location of each site. 
The Group then works with leading architects, 
engineers and designers to deliver quality homes 
for its customers across the spectrum of size, 
location and affordability in great places which it 
creates for its customers and wider stakeholders. 

Driving financial performance 

Berkeley believes that it can operate most 
effectively by maintaining a secure financial 
base and ensuring a disciplined approach to 
risk management over the long-term. 

A strong balance sheet and good visibility over 
performance in the near-term from forward  
sales afford Berkeley a flexibility in its business 
plan which enables it to react to changes in the 
market and continue to deliver new homes. 
Berkeley is ready and able to implement swiftly 
the construction of new phases of its schemes, 
or to adapt planning consents to meet changes 
in market demand. 

The two measures which best demonstrate 
Berkeley’s focus on both performance and balance 
sheet strength are Return on Equity, which has 
risen from 21.2% to 22.4% this year, and estimated 
future Land Bank Gross Margin, which has risen 
to £2,852 million this year from £2,580 million last 
year. Consistent, balanced achievement against  
these two measures will demonstrate long-term 
sustainable success. 

Vision2020 

Our Vision2020 framework has now been in place 
for three years and continues to evolve. The 
changes we have made this year to the structure 
ensure the framework remains closely aligned with 
the overall business strategy. 

Ultimately we believe that an integrated business 
strategy is fundamental to running a sustainable 
business; sustainability should not be considered 
as a separate entity. Importantly, we have not 
removed any of the commitments set in 2012. 

The five areas of focus are: 

Operations: Running our business efficiently and 
considerately and working with our supply chain 

Homes: Developing high quality, well-designed 
homes with low environmental impact 

Places: Creating great places where people enjoy 
a good quality of life, now and in the future 

The Trading and Financial Reviews elsewhere in 
this report provide an overview of the Group’s 
performance in the year. 

Customers: Providing exceptional service to our 
customers throughout the purchasing process and 
after completion 

People: Retaining a highly skilled and passionate 
workforce who work in a safe and supportive 
environment and help us to contribute to wider society 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   25

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

25 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

OPERATIONS
 

Running our business efficiently and considerately 
and working with our supply chain. 

First 

major 
housebuilder 
to sign up to 
the Prompt 
Payment Code 

35.9/40 

(2012: 35.7) 
average 
Considerate 
Constructors 
Scheme score 
(May to 
December) 

7% 

reduction in 
operational 
carbon 
emissions per 
site operative 

Our Vision for 2020 

“Sustainability remains fully integrated into our business strategy  
and operations. We have developed excellent partnerships with our  
supply chain to ensure high quality materials and services are consistently 
provided, and environmental, social and ethical impacts are minimised. 
We will continue to conduct our operations in an environmentally  
efficient manner and with consideration to our neighbours.”

Progress at a Glance: Against key two year commitments 2012-2014 

Supply Chain 

Integrate an assessment of the sustainability of products, suppliers and contractors 
into the formal selection process 

Community
Relations 

Environmental 
Management 

Ensure that all wood purchased by Berkeley is certified by a timber certification scheme 

Register all sites with the Considerate Constructors Scheme and achieve a minimum 
of 35 points out of 50 in site audits (32 out of 40 prior to January 2013) 

Reduce average site carbon dioxide emissions by 3% per site operative by May 2014 

Reduce average site water consumption by 3% per site operative by May 2014 

Re-use or recycle over 85% of construction, demolition and excavation waste 

Key:

  Currently on target to achieve     Not currently on target to achieve 

26  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   26

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
   
  
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

i  Learn more 
about Operations at 
berkeleygroup.co.uk/ 
vision2020/ 
operations 

Developing our Approach 

Our framework is focused on our day-to-day operations, from the inputs to the business to the running 
of our sites. Some of the most significant impacts of our work occur indirectly as part of the wider supply 
chain in the extraction, processing and transportation of materials and as a result of contractors 
working on our sites. Running a sustainable business is dependent upon managing day-to-day 
operations efficiently and with consideration for local people. 

Supply Chain 

We recognise that we use large quantities of 
materials and that some of the most significant 
environmental and social impacts of our  
operations may arise in our supply chain.  
Our Sustainable Procurement Policy requires  
that we work in partnership with our suppliers  
and contractors to minimise these impacts. 

Contractors wishing to tender to work on a 
Berkeley site must confirm they have appropriate 
policies and systems in place to address social 
and environmental issues, in addition to business 
risks and health and safety. 

We have pledged that all timber, temporary and 
permanent, directly and indirectly sourced, must 
be certified to either FSC or PEFC standards. 

To give certainty to our suppliers, and particularly 
small businesses, we registered for the Prompt 
Payment Code in December 2012, committing  
to pay contractors in a timely manner and on a 
weekly basis where appropriate. We were the  
first major housebuilder to do so. 

Community Relations 

We aim to conduct our operations with minimal 
disruption to the communities in which we work 
and to develop good relationships with local 
people and local authorities. We want to ensure 
that we build considerately from the outset. 

In this way, we can improve our efficiency 
by minimising regulatory involvement whilst 
improving community relations. Each of our sites 
aims to communicate and engage with their 
local communities, from sending newsletters 
to hosting school visits and open days. 

All of our construction sites are registered under 
the voluntary Considerate Constructors Scheme 
(CCS) and its Code of Practice. Our audit scores 
continued to increase to an average of 35.9/40 
(2012:35.7). We score consistently above best 
practice guidelines and industry averages. 
Our commitment is regularly recognised by the 
Scheme, with Berkeley receiving 20 awards at 
the 2013 National Site Awards. 

Environmental Management 

All construction sites are regularly assessed on 
compliance with legal requirements, planning 
conditions and industry good practice to help 
us to reduce the risk of regulatory involvement 
and to maintain our record of zero environmental 
prosecutions. 

We monitor energy and water usage monthly 
and set targets for reduction. During 2013 our 
operational carbon emissions per person have 
reduced by 7% to 2.2 tonnes CO2e per year 
(2012: 2.4 tonnes CO2e). During the same period 
our water usage per operative has increased by 
20%; principally this was due to significant water 
demands to ensure effective dust suppression 
during an intensive demolition phase on one 
particular site. 

Our strategy for waste is not only to reduce  
the volume produced, but to ensure that we re-use 
and recycle as much as possible. This year 93%  
of all waste generated on site was recycled. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   27

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

27 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

HOMES
 

Developing high quality, well-designed homes 
with low environmental impact. 

100% 

percentage  
of new homes 
designed to the 
principles of 
Lifetime Homes 

100% 

percentage of 
new homes to 
be certified to 
at least Code 
Level 3 

63% 

(2012: 56%) 
percentage 
of completed 
homes provided 
with energy 
from low carbon 
or renewable 
technology 

Our Vision for 2020 

“Our track record of delivering high quality, well-designed, comfortable 
homes with low environmental impact makes them highly desirable 
to customers. Homes built by Berkeley are recognised throughout the 
industry as the very best examples of quality construction and sustainable 
design. All our new developments are low or zero carbon.” 

Progress at a Glance: Against key two year commitments 2012-2014 

Design Quality	 

Develop minimum design standards on all Berkeley homes including standards for
 
sound insulation, space, storage and overheating
 

Carry out post-occupancy monitoring of electricity, water and gas/heat 
consumption in order to measure the success of our designs and to influence 
the design of future schemes 

Environmental 
Performance 

Undertake R&D to understand the implications of the Government’s proposed zero
 
carbon standard on our future developments
 

Design all new homes to achieve at least Level 3 of the Code for Sustainable Homes 

Key:

  Currently on target to achieve     Not currently on target to achieve 

The Avenue, Farnham Common 

28  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   28

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
   
  
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

i  Learn more  
about Homes at  
berkeleygroup.co.uk/ 
vision2020/homes 

Developing our Approach 

Over the past year we have enhanced this aspect of the Vision2020 framework to reflect our overall aim 
for each home; it must be well-designed, be of a high quality and be environmentally sound. These three 
elements are demanded by all of our stakeholders, from our customers to local and national Government. 

Build Quality 

Environmental Performance 

All of our new homes are designed to achieve at 
least Level 3 of the Code for Sustainable Homes 
and are provided with efficient internal water 
fittings and recycling facilities as standard. 

In 2013, 77% of completed homes were certified 
using an environmental performance methodology 
and increasingly our new developments are 
targeting Code Level 4 where practical. 63% of our 
completed homes were provided with energy from 
renewable or low carbon technology in 2013, up 
from 56% in 2012. 

We continue to support the Government’s move 
to zero carbon and we have commissioned 
experts to conduct research into the implications 
and practicalities of implementing this across  
our business. 

The quality which we demand in our new homes 
requires a skilled workforce and attention to detail. 
Many checks are undertaken both throughout the 
build process and prior to handover to ensure a 
high quality finish has been achieved. 

Our specifications are designed to meet the varied 
needs of all types of homebuyers, from luxurious 
houses to top quality key worker apartments. 

Design Quality 

Each of our homes is bespoke and we use 
qualified architects to design each scheme, whether 
it consists of four or 4,000 homes. This tailored 
approach ensures that we deliver homes and 
communities that meet our customers’ needs. 

Together with excellent external design of the 
buildings and landscaping, we ensure that the 
homes we build are comfortable places in which 
to live, and we set standards for storage, sound 
insulation, air quality and heating. We are also 
committed to investigating indoor air quality; 
this year, we installed air monitoring equipment 
at one of our sites to obtain data on real-life 
performance which we will then feed back into 
the design process. 

In 2013, all new homes were designed to the 
principles of the Lifetime Homes standard for 
adaptability and flexibility. To help stimulate 
discussions and debate around excellent  
design we opened five of our sites to the public 
during the London Festival of Architecture. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   29

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

29 

 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

PLACES
 

Creating great places where people enjoy 
a good quality of life, now and in the future. 

5 

sites already 
assessed under 
our new social 
sustainability 
framework 

£245m 

S106 
contributions 
over the last 
five years 

94% 

live sites 
provided with 
cycle storage 

Our Vision for 2020 

“We create high quality, sustainable places where people choose to live, 
work and spend their time. These are places that directly encourage
people’s well-being and quality of life and offer them a space and a base
from which to lead safe and fulfilling lives. Our ability to transform sites into 
thriving communities is considered the best in our industry. Through 
our ability both to collaborate and to deliver, Berkeley is the developer
of choice for local authorities and existing communities.” 

Progress at a Glance: Against key two year commitments 2012-2014 

Quality of Life 

Work with experts to develop metrics to assess the social sustainability of our 
developments and pilot the metrics on at least one completed development 

Working in
Partnership 

Conduct post-occupancy evaluation to assess the in-use success of community 
facilities (e.g. sports facilities, public realm, open space, children’s activities) 

Follow Berkeley’s Community Engagement Strategy on all planning applications we submit 

Work with residents, commercial occupiers, local businesses and the local community 
on at least one mixed-use development to promote local employment opportunities 

Sustainable 
Communities 

Put in place adaptation measures on all developments to address future climate 
change risks 

Install living roofs (brown or green) on all suitable apartment roof spaces 

Key:

 Currently on target to achieve 

Not currently on target to achieve 

U C T U R E  

C
 o
 m
 m
 u
 n

 i

 t

 y

s
 p
 a

 c
 e

R

T

S

A

T

r

R

F

p

o

n

a

s

Distin

IN
CIAL
L o c a l i n t e g r a t i o n 

ctiv

c

e

h

ara

r

t

 l
i

n

l
s

cter 

S t r e e t l a y o u t 

O
S
D
N
A
S
E
T

I

A  d  a  p  t  a  b  l e   s  p  a  c  e  

L o c a l d e l i v e r y
Linkswith

S

O

C
I

A

L

neighbours 

C

U

g  

e i n

L

T

U

R

A

L

W e ll- b

L

I

F
E

F e e l i n g s o f s a f e t y 
C o m m u n i t y f a c i l i t i e s 

Social sustainability describes the 
way a neighbourhood supports 
individual and collective well-being. 
It is about people’s quality of life. 

For more details on our framework 
for assessing social sustainability, 
see Creating Strong Communities 
berkeleygroup.co.uk/sustainability/ 
socialsustainability 

I

N
E
M
A

30  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

Willingness to act 

A

b

i
l
i
t

y

t

o

i

n

fl

u

e

n

c

e

V

OICE AND IN F L U E N C

E  

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   30

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

i  Learn more  
about Places at  
berkeleygroup.co.uk/ 
vision2020/places 

Developing our Approach 

Delivering well-designed, safe and sustainable places which will endure as settled, vibrant communities 
long into the future is vital to social and economic sustainability. We believe that appreciating the needs 
of our customers and wider stakeholders before, during and after the delivery of our schemes and what 
makes them thrive as a community, is the right model for a truly successful and sustainable business 
in our sector. 

Quality of Life 

Sustainable Communities 

In addition to each individual home being designed 
to be environmentally sound, it is essential that the 
wider development also adheres to these principles 
and allows people to live a sustainable lifestyle. 

Our approach begins with the selection of land 
opportunities, with a focus on developing on 
redundant or under-utilised land; 89% of our 
development this year was on brownfield rather 
than greenfield land. The selection of central sites 
also means we continue to build in well-connected 
locations; 93% of live sites are within 500m of a 
public transport node (2012: 97%) and 94% will 
provide cycle storage (2012: 95%). 

Our commitments apply to every development we 
build, regardless of location or scale. On every site, 
potential flood risks are mitigated and ecologists 
are consulted to protect and enhance biodiversity. 
We also incorporate living roofs on all suitable 
apartment roof spaces. Our commercial space, 
student accommodation and Extra Care housing 
achieve BREEAM Very Good. 

Our new challenge is to ensure that every place 
we create is also designed to provide high levels 
of comfort and can cope with more extreme 
weather conditions. We will continue our  
research into climate change adaptation  
and the additional measures which can be 
incorporated into our developments. 

Over the past two years, in partnership with Social 
Life, we have developed a framework which we are 
now using to measure the social sustainability of our 
developments. The results will help us to improve 
the places we build and to ensure that they 
promote quality of life and well-being. 

In 2013, five of our developments were assessed 
against this framework and we plan to roll out 
the assessment process across more of our 
developments to ensure that our headline 
successes to date; namely that Berkeley  
residents feel they belong, regularly talk  
to neighbours and plan to stay in their 
community, will be consistently delivered. 

We will also be conducting post-occupancy 
evaluation of several aspects of our developments 
to confirm how they function in relation to aspects 
such as crime, security, design quality, travel plans 
and community spaces, to inform our future 
developments. 

Working in Partnership 

Our Community Engagement Strategy is used 
on all developments. We collaborate with the 
planning authority and other local stakeholders 
to tackle the shortage of good quality homes 
and provide an appropriate mix of types and 
tenures. Over the last five years, we have signed 
commitments to provide over 7,000 affordable 
homes including social rent, shared equity, shared 
ownership and Extra Care homes for the elderly. 
We also work in partnership with educational 
establishments to provide high quality student 
accommodation. 

We have funded a broad range of facilities 
and services. Over the past five years, we 
have contributed £245 million through S106 
contributions, as outlined in the Economic 
Impact Assessment of the Berkeley Group 
(berkeleygroup.co.uk/sustainability/economic). 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   31

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

31 

 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

CUSTOMERS
 

Providing exceptional service to our customers throughout 
the purchasing process and after completion. 

98% 

(2012: 97%) 
percentage 
of customers 
that would 
recommend  
us to a friend 

81% 

percentage of 
customers who 
are concerned 
about 
protecting the 
environment 

Our Vision for 2020 

“We consistently meet or exceed our customers’ expectations by delivering 
well-designed, beautiful homes and communities where they can live 
happy, healthy and environmentally-efficient lifestyles. The service that we 
aim to provide to our customers throughout the purchasing process and 
after completion is exceptional. Customers are positioned at the heart 
of our business and central to the decisions that we make.” 

Progress at a Glance: Against key two year commitments 2012-2014 

The Customer 
Experience 

Customer 
Satisfaction 

Sustainable 
Living 

Provide every customer with a Berkeley Customer Satisfaction Commitment 

Provide user-friendly ‘quick start’ instructions and guides for running a home 

Survey every customer to measure satisfaction and target that at least 95% of our 
customers would recommend us to a friend 

Train sales staff in sustainability so that they are able to sell the benefits to customers 

Produce a Berkeley Sustainable Living Guide in conjunction with NGOs for use in 
sales & marketing suites, at handover, as well as an interactive version of the Guide 
for our website 

Key:

  Currently on target to achieve     Not currently on target to achieve 

32  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   32

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
  
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

i   Learn more  
about Customers at 
berkeleygroup.co.uk/ 
vision2020/customers 

Developing our Approach 

The customer is at the heart of every decision that we make, from the land that we buy, through 
development planning, to the detailed design, specification and construction of our housing and 
commercial space. Our strategy is based on ensuring that customers remain as a central focus and 
we continue to strive for exceptional performance. The experience of our customers is central to 
Berkeley’s reputation, its ability to secure sales and hence the viability of the future business. 

The Customer Experience 

Sustainable Lifestyles 

We have a role to play in promoting sustainable 
lifestyles to residents and helping them to operate 
their home efficiently and make the best use 
of local facilities. We also believe that this is 
something our customers want; in our 2012 
Customer Sustainability Survey, 81% of customers 
agreed or strongly agreed that they were 
concerned about protecting the environment. 

Helping Create a Better Future: Our Guide to 
More Sustainable Living, was produced to 
provide information to customers on sustainability 
issues and give ideas on how to adopt a more 
sustainable lifestyle. This is available within all 
marketing suites and we will also be developing 
an online version. 

We aim to make the home buying process as 
straightforward and enjoyable as possible for all our 
customers, and to provide a professional, efficient, 
business-like and helpful service at all times. 

Our commitment to our customers is that: 

“When you buy a new home from Berkeley you 
can be safe in the knowledge that it is built to 
very high standards of design and quality, has low 
environmental impact and that you will enjoy an 
exceptional customer experience.” 

Customer Satisfaction 

We support the Consumer Code for Homebuilders 
which applies to all our buyers. This requires that 
home buyers are treated fairly, know what service 
levels to expect, are given reliable information 
upon which to make their decision and know how 
to access speedy, low-cost dispute-resolution 
arrangements if they are dissatisfied. 

We use customer satisfaction surveys undertaken 
by an independent external agency to measure 
how well we are meeting our customers’ 
expectations. All of our private purchasers are 
asked to complete a survey, and this year 98% 
of our customers reported that they would 
recommend Berkeley to a friend (2012: 97%). 
This is above our target of 95%. 

We also see the opportunity presented by 
engaging with customers to inform better 
design. We invite feedback from all of our 
customers and use this to improve our homes. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   33

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

33 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

OUR PEOPLE
 

Retaining a highly skilled and passionate workforce 
who work in a safe and supportive environment 
and help us to contribute to wider society. 

115 

number of 
apprentices who 
worked on our 
sites in 2012 

2.99 

per 1,000 
employees 
and operatives 
(2012: 2.69) 
Accident 
Incident Rate 

£2.8m 

funds 
committed to 
good causes 
through the 
Berkeley 
Foundation 

Our Vision for 2020 

“We retain a highly skilled and passionate workforce which enables us to 
run a successful and sustainable business. Our staff are supported in their 
roles and this is extended to our contractors’ operatives. Health and safety 
remains a focus area, ensuring that our sites are healthy and safe places 
to work. Through the Berkeley Foundation we continue to provide funding 
and support for worthy causes and will have enabled many young people
to get into work.” 

Progress at a Glance: Against key two year commitments 2012-2014 

Support and
Training 

Measure staff retention rates and workforce diversity and benchmark performance 

Ensure that a minimum of 5% of our own staff and those working on our construction 
sites are employed in an apprenticeship or training role 

Health and Safety  Continue to achieve a RIDDOR reportable Accident Incident Rate (AIR) of less than 3.5 

incidents per 1,000 employees and subcontractors 

Continue to achieve a RIDDOR reportable Accident Frequency Rate (AFR) of less than 
0.175 per 100,000 hours worked 

Further enhance the Group’s ‘Good Work’ programme through active engagement 
with contractors’ operatives on all our projects 

The Berkeley
Foundation 

Capture and quantify our work with charities and local communities and 
benchmark performance 

Raise £250,000 annually for the Berkeley Foundation through employee 
fundraising and donations 

Key:

  Currently on target to achieve     Not currently on target to achieve 

34  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   34

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
  
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

i   Learn more  
about Our people at 
berkeleygroup.co.uk/ 
vision2020/ 
our-people 

Developing our Approach 

Berkeley has autonomous management teams which operate under five core brands: Berkeley; 
St George; St James; St Edward and Berkeley First. These teams represent the people charged with 
implementing the Group’s strategy across all of its day-to-day operations. Recruiting and retaining a 
high calibre workforce is crucial to our approach. We require all of our people to engage in the Group’s 
philosophy, to show the passion for excelling in every area of the business with the Berkeley spirit of 
entrepreneurial flair and to share in our aspiration for long-term sustainable success. 

Support and Training 

Health and Safety 

As the business has grown over recent years our 
headcount has more than doubled from some 700 
in April 2009 to over 1,400 in April 2013. This growth 
is coupled with a stability which has retained a 
core pool of knowledge and experience within the 
Group, demonstrated by an average service length 
in excess of 10 years amongst senior management. 

In recent years the Group has developed a 
particular focus on helping young people into 
work. Our graduate scheme has been running 
since 2006 and 87 graduates are in the business 
today. In 2013, the Berkeley Sales Academy 
was formed to provide structured training for 
sales consultants joining Berkeley from diverse 
backgrounds. 

In the last year, Berkeley directly or indirectly 
supported approximately 16,000 jobs in the 
UK, including 7,447 contractors’ employees. 
On average, 4.5 new jobs are created for each 
home built. This included over 115 full time 
apprenticeships on our sites during the year 
to help young people to gain experience and 
develop core skills to help provide the workforce 
of the future. Currently 7% of our own workforce 
and those working on our construction sites are 
employed in an apprenticeship or training role. 

In June 2013, Berkeley announced a commitment 
to give training and work to 250 unemployed 
people through a major new job creation scheme 
through Berkeley and its partners. 

Our ‘Good Order’ and ‘Good Work’ programmes 
continue to reinforce the importance and culture 
of health and safety on our sites. Our Accident 
Incident Rate (AIR) is 2.99 (2012: 2.69) and remains at 
a level which continues to outperform the industry. 

Our commitment to high health and safety 
standards has been recognised by both the Royal 
Society for Prevention of Accidents (RoSPA) and 
the National House Building Council (NHBC). We 
received two Silver Awards, nine Gold Awards and 
five Gold Medal Awards from RoSPA this year, our 
best performance to date. Four of our sites have 
been shortlisted for the NHBC Health & Safety 
Awards in the ‘Best Site Award’ category. 

The Berkeley Foundation 

The Berkeley Charitable Foundation, launched 
in March 2011, has so far committed £2.8 million 
to more than 40 charities and worthy causes. 
These range from partnerships with major national 
charities to small local charities chosen by our staff. 
Our focus areas are tackling homelessness and 
youth unemployment. 

The money comes from two sources. Staff from the 
Berkeley Group have raised £550,000 from friends, 
family, colleagues and other companies. The rest is 
given to the Foundation by the Berkeley Group itself 
or generated through fundraising events. Alongside 
the money they raise, staff donate through Give As 
You Earn and offer their time and talent to support 
individual causes. The Group match funds all the 
cash raised by staff for the Foundation. 

The Berkeley Foundation annual report contains 
more details of how this money is disbursed through 
a small set of strategic partnerships, through a series 
of designated charities chosen by our local offices 
and through grants and sponsorship. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   35

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

35 

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

150 Berkeley employees successfully 
completed the ascent of Tower 42  
in London in aid of the Berkeley  
Foundation this year. 

36  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013
 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   36

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
 
RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   37

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

37
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Chelsea Creek, Fulham 

38  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   38

22/07/2013   15:22

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L
R
E
V
E
W

I

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

TRADING & 
FINANCIAL REVIEW 

Berkeley’s strong results this year are  
a direct result of a period of sustained  
investment in the Berkeley business  
over several years. 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   39

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

39 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

Abell and Cleland House, 
Westminster 

40  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013
 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   40

22/07/2013   15:22

  
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

TRADING REVIEW
 

Trading Performance 

Berkeley is pleased to report a 26.0% increase 
in profit before tax from £214.8 million in 2012 to 
£270.7 million this year. This is an increase in basic 
earnings per share from 121.0 pence to 160.0 
pence in 2013 (a 32.2% rise). Net asset value per 
share has risen from 839.3 pence at 30 April 2012 
to 1,009.1 pence at 30 April 2013. This is reflected 
in a pre-tax return of shareholders’ equity of 22.4% 
(2012: 21.2%). 

The Group has further invested in the business 
this year, with inventories increasing from £1,851.7 
million at the start of the year to £2,066.7 million 
at 30 April 2013. The Group has nevertheless been 
cash generative and ended the year ungeared, 
converting net debt of £57.9 million at 30 April 
2012 to net cash of £44.7 million at 30 April 2013, 
thereby maintaining a strong, stable balance sheet. 

Investment in the business has included a 
commitment of over £315 million in ten new sites, 
eight of which are in London including London 
Dock in Wapping and South Quay Plaza in 
Docklands, and continued funding of construction 
across the Group’s sites in London and the South 
of England. Alongside optimisation of some £150 
million secured in the year, this investment has 
increased the estimated gross margin in the  
land bank by £272 million to £2,852 million. 

Long-Term Strategic Plan 

Under the long-term strategic plan agreed 
with shareholders to return £1.7 billion by 30 
September 2021, progress towards the three 
milestones is as follows: 

Returns to 
Shareholders 
£’million 

Pence 
per
share 

First interim dividend 
paid April 2013 

Second interim dividend 
payable September 2013 

Balance to be paid by 
30 September 2015 (first milestone) 

By 30 September 2018 
(second milestone) 

By 30 September 2021 
(third milestone) 

20 

77 

15 

59 

472 

360 

567 

433 

567 

433 

1,703 

1,300 

The Board has considered the current financial 
position of the Group and determined that it is 
appropriate to propose a further interim dividend 
of 59 pence per share, payable on 27 September 
2013 to shareholders on the register on 30 August 
2013. This payment is a further £77.3 million 
towards the first milestone payment. 

The Group will consider any future dividends 
against the prevailing market conditions and the 
financial position of the business, subject always 
to meeting the milestones set out under the 
long-term strategic plan. 

Housing Market 

The housing market in London and the South of 
England has continued to be supported by strong 
demand in good locations. 

London has maintained its position as a major 
global city and continued to attract more people 
and inward investment. This position brings 
with it an inherent demand for accommodation 
which is not currently being met by supply and, 
with the pressure on London to house a growing 
population and an increased number of new 
households more generally, this shortfall is likely 
to be exacerbated as new homes are not being 
built quickly enough to reduce it. 

Outside London, visitor levels in the traditional, 
predominantly owner-occupier markets in 
which Berkeley operates have remained steady 
compared to last year. They continue to run at 
below the peak levels seen prior to 2008 before 
the downturn, although a rise in visitors and 
associated activity is expected to result across 
the industry as the Government’s Help to Buy 
scheme and then the Mortgage Indemnity 
Guarantee begins to roll out across the sector. 
Berkeley considers this a positive intervention as 
it should help bring more people, whether trying 
to get onto or move up the housing ladder, into 
the market. 

Cancellation rates for the year stood at broadly 
11% which is at the lower end of the range of 
historical levels and reflects a steady, underlying 
market. House prices have been consistent with 
the more general commentary in the wider market. 

Berkeley held 140 completed residential 
properties at 30 April 2013 (251 at 30 April 2012). 
These provide the Group with a limited number 
of homes available for immediate sale, principally 
in those owner-occupier-led markets which require 
available product. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L
R
E
V
E
W

I

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   41

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

41 

 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

£315 
million 

committed to 
new land 

New Land Acquisition 

This year Berkeley has invested a further £315 
million in new land, acquiring ten sites with some 
3,000 plots. Eight of the sites are in London, some 
99% of the plots, and two outside London. 

The unconditional purchase of the 15-acre former 
News International printworks in Wapping, on the 
fringes of the City of London, for £150 million at 
the start of the year remains the most significant 
transaction this year. Berkeley also recently 
concluded the purchase of South Quay Plaza 
in London’s Docklands, a 1.9 acre site adjacent 
to Canary Wharf. Other purchases in Chiswick, 
Hammersmith, Wimbledon, Mill Hill, Finchley and 
Richmond have extended Berkeley’s holdings in 
good locations across West and North London. 

Planning and Optimisation 

Berkeley has continued to focus on enhancing its 
land bank by removing risk through the planning 
process and improving and tailoring existing 
consents to the evolving demands of the market. 

Berkeley has achieved new consents on 17 sites in 
the year. 10 of these were on the London schemes, 
including consents at the 52-storey mixed-use 
scheme at One Blackfriars, Hampton House on the 
Albert Embankment, a student scheme in Acton 
and sites in Finchley and Hammersmith. Outside 
London seven new consents have been secured in 
Maidenhead, Caterham, Cheltenham, Tunbridge 
Wells, Ascot, Tadworth and Guildford. Over 85% 
of Berkeley’s sites now have an implementable 
planning consent, covering some 80% of the plots 
in the land bank. 

Review and optimisation of consents secured 
remains core to Berkeley’s activities and recognises 
that developing complex sites over the long-term 
needs a constant reappraisal of what customers 
desire from a new home and local communities 
demand from the new places that Berkeley creates. 
It is a means to protect and often enhance value 
in Berkeley’s land bank whilst ensuring that its 
approach to each site remains fresh and effective. 

This year, Berkeley has added some 7% of value to 
its land bank through optimisation, a figure which 
reflects enhanced consents on sites which it owns 
or controls. There have also been four planning 
refusals this year on sites acquired on a subject-
to-planning basis. The applications on these sites 
are currently being resubmitted or appealed, 
highlighting the complexity in the planning 
process which is ultimately holding back  
delivery of much needed housing. 

Land Bank 

The combination of new land and optimisation 
of existing land means that, at 30 April 2013, 
Berkeley’s land bank stood at 25,684 plots (30 
April 2012: 26,021) with an estimated gross margin 
of £2,852 million (30 April 2012: £2,580 million). 
The average selling price in the land bank has 
also increased from £345,000 at 30 April 2012 to 
£378,000 at 30 April 2013, a result of the increased 
weighting towards schemes in London acquired 
in the year. 

There remain approximately 10,000 plots in 
Berkeley’s longer-term land bank. This includes 
land under option which requires promotion 
through the planning system and long-term 
regeneration land under contract. A 180-home 
development at Chambers Wharf in Southwark 
has been brought through from this strategic 
land bank in the current year. 

Berkeley remains on target to meet its previously 
announced aspiration to increase the value of 
the estimated gross margin in the land bank to 
£3 billion by April 2014, one year earlier than 
originally planned. 

Owned 

Contracted 

Agreed 

Plots 

Sales value 

Average selling price 

Average plot cost 

Land cost 

Gross margin 

April 2013 

25,055 

629 

– 

25,684 

£9,707m 

£378k 

£62k 

16.5% 

£2,852m 

29.4% 

Change 

-700 

+383 

-20 

-337 

+£718m 

+£33k 

+£7k 

+0.5% 

+£272m 

+0.7% 

April 2012 

25,755 

246 

20 

26,021 

£8,989m 

£345k 

£55k 

16.0% 

£2,580m 

28.7% 

42  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   42

22/07/2013   15:22

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

Running a Sustainable Business 

Berkeley aims to create great places where people 
choose to live, work and spend their time; places 
that directly encourage people’s well-being and 
quality of life by transforming its sites into thriving 
communities. This is at the heart of Berkeley’s 
business model. 

Berkeley’s corporate plan is to return £1.7 billion 
to shareholders by 2021 and to remain one of 
the most successful and sustainable businesses 
in Britain. 

This plan requires safe, sustainable performance 
and has a strategy to deliver this, rewarding those 
who invest in the company with a clear profile of 
cash returns and giving them and Berkeley’s other 
stakeholders confidence that a resilient underlying 
business will be retained for the long-term. 

Berkeley’s core performance measures of return 
on equity and future gross margin in the land bank 
best track progress against this dual objective, with 
return on equity providing an ongoing earnings 
measure and future gross margin in the land 
supporting the value of the residual business. 

The immediate priority for the Board is to meet 
the first milestone of returning £568 million in 
cash by 30 September 2015 and with this a focus 
on delivering strong and consistent returns on 
equity while aiming to achieve a land bank with 
an estimated gross margin in excess of £3 billion 
by the end of April 2014. 

Berkeley is well-placed to achieve its targets but 
is mindful of the risks that geopolitical events, 
regulation, increases in taxation alongside 
an uncertain future tax policy and even anti-
competitive rhetoric can have on the business 
and the wider housing market. 

AWARDS
 

Whilst the business is not run in order to secure 
awards, we are proud to have received a number 
of awards throughout the year. 

For the second time, we have been recognised 
by Management Today as one of Britain’s Most 
Admired Companies. We were joined at the 
top of the chart by some of the country’s most 
successful and respected companies and were 
the highest placed housebuilder. The Group 
has also been ranked as one of the Top 10 
companies across Europe for the Infosys Business 
of the Year Award (t/o €150m+) category of the 
2012/13 European Business Awards, picking 
up a ‘Ruban d’Honneur’ award. 

These awards celebrate the most innovative 
businesses on the continent by promoting 
success, innovation and ethics in the European 
business community. 

For the seventh year running we were ranked as 
the top homebuilder in the 2012 NextGeneration 
benchmarking initiative. The benchmark ranks 
the UK’s 25 largest homebuilders according to 
their sustainability strategy and performance. 

Next Generation 
Benchmark 2012 

Britain’s Most Admired 
Company 2012 

European Business
Awards 2012 

Ranked as the most 
sustainable homebuilder for 
the 7th successive year 

Ranked second across 
businesses from all sectors 

Ranked as one of the Top 10 
companies across Europe 
through award of a Ruban 
D’Honneur award 

£2,852 
million 

estimated gross 
margin in the 
land bank 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L
R
E
V
E
W

I

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   43

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

43 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

75 Leman Street, 
Aldgate 

44  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013
 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   44

22/07/2013   15:22

  
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L
R
E
V
E
W

I

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   45

22/07/2013   15:22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

45
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

The Boatyard, 
Kingston 

46  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013
 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   46

22/07/2013   15:23

  
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

FINANCIAL REVIEW
 

Headline Results 

  Year ended 30 April  

2013 
£’million 

2012 
£’million 

Change
£’million 

Revenue 

1,372.6 

1,041.1 

+331.5 

Operating profit before exceptional item 

280.1 

Exceptional profit on disposal of subsidiary 

-

Operating profit 

Net finance costs 

Share of joint ventures result 

Profit before tax 

Taxation 

Profit after tax 

EPS Basic 

ROE 

280.1 

(8.1) 

(1.3) 

270.7 

(61.0) 

209.7 

160.0p 

22.4% 


195.7 

30.7 

226.4 

(9.4) 

(2.2) 

214.8 

(56.7) 

158.1 

121.0p 

21.2% 

+84.4 

-30.7 

+53.7 

+1.3 

+0.9 

+55.9 

-4.3 

+51.6 

+39.0p 

+1.2%

% 

+31.8% 

+43.1% 

+23.7% 

+26.0% 

+32.6% 

+32.2% 

  Units sold 

Average selling price 

3,712 

£354,000 


3,565 

£280,000 

Land sales of £8.3 million (2012: £2.1 million) 
were from the opportunistic disposal of three 
sites in the year. 

Revenue from commercial activities of £26.4 million 
included the sale of a site adjacent to One Tower 
Bridge with a consent for the construction of a 
hotel and 45,000 sq ft of commercial space across 
a number of the Group’s mixed-use developments. 
In 2012, £19.4 million of commercial revenue was 
from the sale of 54,000 sq ft of space including 
a hotel at Blackheath, a storage facility at Royal 
Arsenal Riverside and a Community Centre at 
Woodberry Park. 

Trading Analysis 

Group revenue was £1,372.6 million this year 
(2012: £1,041.1 million) which comprised £1,337.9 
million from the sale of residential homes 
(2012: £1,019.6 million), £8.3 million from land 
sales (2012: £2.1 million) and £26.4 million of 
commercial sales (2012: £19.4 million). 

The residential revenue of £1,337.9 million (2012: 
£1,021.7 million) arose from the sale of 3,712 new 
homes in the period (2012: 3,565) at an average 
selling price of £354,000 (2012: £280,000). These 
sales were from both private and affordable 
homes as well as student accommodation across 
Berkeley’s riverside, regeneration and housing 
schemes across London and the South of England. 
Changes in the mix of properties completed this 
year compared to last are behind the increase 
in average selling price (up 26.4%) with a rise in 
volumes (up 4.1%), including the acceleration 
of the delivery of 149 apartments at Grosvenor 
Waterside, also contributing to the overall 
increase. Looking forward, the mix of schemes 
currently in construction is expected to become 
increasingly weighted towards a lower volume 
of higher value properties, entirely consistent 
with sites acquired in London since 2009. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L
R
E
V
E
W

I

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   47

22/07/2013   15:23

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

47 

  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

£270.7 
million 

pre-tax profit 
up 26.0% 

Profit Before Tax 

Financial Position 

The 26.0% rise in profit before tax this year is from 
a combination of five factors: 

Profit before tax: 2012 
Increase in gross margin 
Increase in overheads 
Exceptional profit on disposal of subsidiary (2012) 
Decrease in net finance costs 
Increase in result from joint ventures 

Profit before tax: 2013 

£’million 

214.8

+108.1

-23.7 
-30.7 
+1.3 
+0.9 

270.7 

The change of mix of the residential properties 
sold is behind the increase in Berkeley’s gross 
margin by 1.0% to 29.4% which is trending towards 
the land bank gross margin. Overheads have 
increased by £23.7 million to £123.3 million but 
reduced as a percentage of revenue from 9.6% to 
9.0%. This combination of factors has contributed 
to the overall increase in the pre-exceptional 
operating margin from 18.8% to 20.4%. 

The results for 2012 included the exceptional 
profit of £30.7 million on the disposal of a 
student scheme at Clapham Junction in London. 

The share of post-tax results of joint ventures was 
a loss of £1.3 million (2012: loss of £2.2 million), 
a combination of continuing investment in the 
development pipeline on St Edward Homes’ 
schemes at 375 Kensington High Street and 
190 Strand and the timing of the completion  
of sales at Stanmore Place. 

Net finance costs have decreased by £1.3 million 
to £8.1 million, this decrease reflecting the Group’s 
reduced average debt profile this year compared 
to last culminating in a net cash position at 
30 April 2013. 

The result is an increase of 26.0% in profit before 
tax from £214.8 million in 2012 to £270.7 million 
in 2013. With the benefit of a reduction in the 
UK corporation tax rate having mainly led to the 
decrease in the Group’s effective tax rate from 
26.4% to 22.5%, basic earnings per share have 
risen by 32.2% from 121.0 pence to 160.0 pence. 

Berkeley has continued to invest in the business 
in a controlled way. Capital employed has risen 
by £120.0 million to £1,277.7 million in the year 
(30 April 2012: £1,157.7 million). This is supported 
by an increase in cash due on forward sales to 
£1,452.8 million (30 April 2012: £1,055.7 million) 
which, together with deposits received of £426.1 
million (30 April 2012: £422.9 million), provides 
good visibility over future earnings. 

This is reflected in an increase in inventories by 
£215.0 million to £2,066.7 million (30 April 2012: 
£1,851.7 million) which comprises £310.0 million 
of land not under development (30 April 2012: 
£360.5 million) which is generally land which does 
not have an implementable planning consent, 
£1,711.7 million of work in progress (30 April 2012: 
£1,422.6 million), an increase which demonstrates 
Berkeley’s continued investment in the delivery of 
its schemes, and £45.0 million of completed stock 
(30 April 2012: £68.6 million). Increases to build 
costs are a risk to the business and one which is 
becoming more prevalent as construction activity 
in and around London increases. 

Trade and other payables of £1,021.4 million 
(30 April 2012: £893.1 million) include £426.1 
million of on account receipts (30 April 2012: 
£422.9 million) and land creditors of £180.9 million 
(30 April 2012: £122.8 million). The increase in 
land creditors is almost exclusively due to the 
acquisition of a site in Wapping at the start of 
the year for £150 million, payable in installments. 
The Group also holds provisions of £29.0 million 
which includes £23.6 million in respect of post 
completion development obligations and £5.4 
million of other provisions arising in the ordinary 
course of business. 

Despite the investment in new land and 
construction across its sites, the Group ended 
the year ungeared with net cash of £44.7 million, 
compared to net debt of £57.9 million at the  
start of the year. £291.8 million of cash was 
generated from operations before working  
capital movements (2012: £281.7 million including 
£75.7 million from the proceeds on disposal of 
a subsidiary), offset by a net investment in working 
capital of £102.8 million (2012: £314.9 million) 
and tax and other cash outflows of £86.4 million 
(2012: £66.7 million). 

48  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   48

22/07/2013   15:23

 
   
        
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 




TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

  Analysis of capital employed 

Investment properties  

Assets held for resale 

Other non-current assets 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Trade and other payables 

     - Deposits and on account receipts 

     - Land creditors 

     - Other trade payables 

Current tax liabilities 

  Provisions 

Capital employed 

  Analysis of inventories 

Land not under development 

Work in progress: land cost 

Work in progress: build cost 

Completed units 

Cash	flow	 

Profit before tax  

Increase in inventories 

Other working capital movements 

Tax paid 

Other movements 

Cash inflow/(outflow) before dividends 

  Dividends 

Increase/(decrease) in net (debt)/cash 

Opening net (debt)/cash 

Closing net cash/(debt) 

April 2013
£’million 

Change
£’million 

April 2012
£’million 

26.5 

75.8 

134.3 

2,066.7 

126.8 

(426.1) 

(180.9) 

(414.4) 

(102.0) 

(29.0) 

1,277.7 

-57.0 

+75.8 

+34.0 

+215.0 

+11.6 

-3.2 

-58.1 

-66.9 

-2.2 

-29.0 

83.5 

-

100.3 

1,851.7 

115.2 

(422.9)

(122.8)

(347.5) 

(99.8)

-

+120.0 

1,157.7 

April 2013
£’million 

Change
£’million 

April 2012
£’million 

310.0 

860.7 

1,170.7 

851.0 

45.0 

2,066.7 

-50.5 

+136.9 

+86.4 

+152.2 

-23.6 

+215.0 

360.5 

723.8 

1,084.3 

698.8 

68.6 

1,851.7 

2013 
£’million	 

2012 
£’million 

270.7 

(215.0) 

112.2 

(69.2) 

23.6 

122.3 

(19.7) 

102.6 

(57.9) 

44.7 

214.8 

(238.5) 

(76.4) 

(53.7) 

53.9 

(99.9)

-

(99.9) 

42.0 

(57.9) 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L
R
E
V
E
W

I

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   49

22/07/2013   15:23

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

49 

   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
   
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

Joint Ventures 

Taxation 

There are three schemes under construction in 
St Edward Homes, Berkeley’s joint venture with 
Prudential. These include Stanmore Place, 375 
Kensington High Street and also 190 Strand at 
which construction commenced in the second 
half of the year to 30 April 2013. During the year, 
66 homes were sold at Stanmore Place at an 
average selling price of £277,000 (2012: 188 
homes at £170,000). 

The focus in St Edward this year has been on 
progressing construction at 375 Kensington High 
Street and the start of development at 190 Strand. 
At 30 April 2013, investments accounted for using 
the equity method of £44.1 million (30 April 2012: 
£46.5 million) relate almost exclusively to Berkeley’s 
interest in St Edward’s schemes. 

The St Edward Homes business is partly funded 
by bank debt and the remainder by Berkeley and 
Prudential. There is £60 million of banking facilities 
in St Edward Homes of which £34 million was 
utilised at the year end (30 April 2012: £3 million). 

Berkeley’s land bank includes 1,592 plots  
(30 April 2012: 1,658 plots) in respect of St Edward 
Homes’ schemes. 

The Group’s policy is to pay the amount of tax 
legally due and to observe all applicable rules 
and regulations. At the same time we have an 
obligation to maximise shareholder value and 
to manage financial and reputational risk. This 
includes minimising and controlling our tax costs, 
as we look to do for all costs of our business. 
Factors that may affect the Group’s tax charge 
include changes in legislation, the impact of 
corporate activity (restructuring, acquisitions, 
disposals, etc), the resolution of open tax issues 
from prior years and planning opportunities. The 
Group makes provision for potential tax liabilities 
that may arise, however the amount ultimately 
paid may differ from the amount accrued. 

Banking Facilities 

The Group has maintained substantial headroom 
within its business plan and committed corporate 
banking facilities remain at £525 million, of which 
£250 million matures in April 2018 (a one year 
extension having been agreed on 8 April 2013) 
and £275 million in May 2018 (a one year extension 
having been agreed on 24 May 2013). These 
facilities provide further clarity of financing to 
support the Group’s business plan for five years 
through to 2018. 

Berkeley and Prudential continue to work together 
to identify further opportunities to secure sites to 
which St Edward Homes can add value. 

Financial Risk 

Rental Fund 

Berkeley’s private rental fund was set up in August 
2010 and held 729 properties at 30 April 2013  
(612 at 30 April 2012). These investment properties 
are held at historic cost and have increased from 
£83.5 million at 30 April 2012 to £102.3 million at 
30 April 2013. The Homes and Communities 
Agency (HCA) committed £17.4 million, classified 
as debt, to fund the acquisition of 534 of these 
properties. The remaining 195 properties held at 
30 April 2013 for investment are wholly funded by 
Berkeley and follow the disposal of 71 properties 
in the year where market conditions have 
supported their divestment. 

The core aim of the fund was to build and run a 
portfolio of private rental properties that would be 
attractive to institutional investors. During the year, 
Berkeley exchanged contracts to sell the 534 HCA 
funded residential properties for £105.4 million 
to M&G Investments. The net proceeds of sale 
will be £75.2 million after repayment of the HCA’s 
funding and the transaction, which completed 
on 5 June 2013, will be reported in the results 
for the year ending 30 April 2014. The proceeds 
are net of a £10 million minority investment in 
the fund. The properties subject to the sale are 
disclosed as ‘Non-current assets classified as held 
for sale’ within current assets at £75.8 million. The 
remaining 195 properties are held at £26.5 million 
in investment properties in non-current assets. 

The Group finances its operations by a combination 
of shareholders’ funds, deposits and on account 
receipts and borrowings where drawn. 

As the Group’s operations are in sterling there is 
no direct significant currency risk, and therefore 
the Group’s main financial risks are primarily: 

– Liquidity risk - the risk that suitable funding for 
the Group’s activities may not be available. 

–  Market credit risk - the risk that counterparties 
will default on their contractual obligations 
resulting in a loss to the Group. The Group’s 
exposure to credit risk is comprised of the 
cash and cash equivalents and trade and other 
receivables held within current assets on the 
consolidated balance sheet. 

–  Market interest rate risk - the risk that Group 
financing activities are adversely affected by 
fluctuations in market interest rates. 

The Board approves treasury policy and senior 
management control day-to-day operations. 
Relationships with banks and cash management 
are co-ordinated centrally. The objectives of the 
treasury policy are to maintain an appropriate 
capital structure and in doing so manage the 
financial risks identified above. 

50  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   50

22/07/2013   15:23

 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

Operating Risk 

All businesses are exposed to risk. Indeed, 
alongside risk comes opportunity and it is how 
such risks are managed that determines the 
success of the Group’s strategy and, ultimately, its 
performance and results. Berkeley’s strategy allows 
management to focus on creating sustainable 
long-term value for its shareholders, whilst taking 
advantage of opportunities as they arise in the 
short- and medium-term. 

Risk management is embedded in the organisation 
at operating company, divisional and Group levels, 
with different types of risk requiring different levels 
and types of management response. 

The principal operating risks of the Group which 
have been considered by the Board include, but 
are not limited to the risks as set out on pages 
52 and 53. 

The Internal Control section within the Corporate 
Governance report on page 81 sets out the 
Group’s overall framework for internal control, 
setting the context for the identification, control 
and monitoring of these and other risks faced 
by the Group. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L
R
E
V
E
W

I

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

Image shown is computer generated and indicative only. 

Chelsea Creek 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   51

22/07/2013   15:23

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

51 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

BERKELEY’S PRINCIPAL OPERATING RISKS


Risk Description 

Mitigation 

ECONOMIC CONDITIONS 

As a property developer Berkeley’s business, in the 
context of the wider housing market, is sensitive to 
changes in interest rates, unemployment and general 
consumer confidence. Some of its customers are also 
sensitive to changes in the sterling exchange rate. 

Significant economic uncertainty exists in the UK, 
Europe and worldwide and this may lead to a 
reduction in demand for housing which could 
impact on the Group’s ability to deliver its 
corporate strategy. 

Berkeley’s business strategy reflects the cyclical nature of property development. 

Funds are carefully targeted at investing only in land which is underpinned by demand 
fundamentals that support a solid viability case even when markets are uncertain. 

Levels of committed expenditure are carefully monitored against sales secured and 
bank facilities available, with the objective of keeping financial risk low to mitigate 
the operating risks of delivery in uncertain markets. 

The business is committed to operating at an optimal size, with a strong balance 
sheet, to maintain the flexibility to react swiftly, when necessary, to changes in 
market conditions. 

REGULATION 

Adverse changes to Government policy on areas 
such as taxation, housing and environmental 
matters could restrict the ability of the Group to 
deliver its strategy. 

Failure to comply with laws and regulations 
could expose the Group to penalties and 
reputational damage. 

PLANNING 

Delays or refusals in obtaining commercially 
viable planning permissions on the Group’s land 
holdings could result in the Group being unable 
to develop the land it has purchased. 

This could have a direct impact on the  
Group’s ability to deliver its product and on  
its profitability. 

PEOPLE 

An inability to attract, develop, motivate and retain 
talented employees could have an impact on the 
Group’s ability to deliver its strategic priorities.
 

Failure to consider the retention and succession 
of key management could result in a loss of 
knowledge and competitive advantage. 

SALES 

An inability to match supply to demand in terms of 
product, location and price could result in missed 
sales targets and / or inefficient levels of completed 
stock which in turn could impact on the Group’s 
ability to deliver its corporate strategy. 

MORTGAGE AVAILABILITY 

The effects of changes to Government policies at all levels are closely monitored and 
representations made where necessary. 

Berkeley’s experienced teams are well-placed to interpret and implement new 
regulation at the appropriate time through direct lines of communication across the 
Group. Detailed policies and procedures are in place and these are communicated  
to all staff. 

Full detailed planning and risk assessments are performed and monitored for each 
site without planning permission, both before and after purchase. 

The planning status of all sites is reviewed at monthly divisional Board meetings and 
bi-monthly Main Board meetings. 

The Group works closely with local communities in respect of planning proposals and 
strong local relationships are maintained with local authorities and planning officers. 

The Group is focused on the markets of London and the South of England in planning 
regimes which it understands and where it believes it therefore has a competitive advantage. 

Remuneration packages are constantly benchmarked against the industry to ensure 

they remain competitive.
 

Succession planning is regularly reviewed at both divisional and Main Board level. 

Close relationships and dialogue are maintained with key personnel. 

Detailed market demand assessments of each site are undertaken before acquisition, 
and regularly during delivery of each scheme, to ensure that supply is matched to 
demand in each location. 

Design, product type and product quality are all assessed on a site-by-site basis to 
ensure that they meet the target market and customer aspirations in that location. 

The Group has a diverse range of developments with homes available at a broad 
range of property prices to appeal to a wide market. 

Forward sales are used to take the risk out of the development cycle where possible, 
thereby justifying the financial investment in each of the Group’s sites. 

Completed stock levels are reviewed and debated at monthly divisional Board 
meetings and bi-monthly Main Board meetings. 

Mortgage providers have been negatively impacted  Berkeley has a broad product mix and customer base which reduces the reliance on 

by the financial crisis and this has reduced their 
ability to provide mortgages to potential purchasers.
 

mortgage availability across its portfolio.
 

The Group is participating in the Government backed mortgage indemnity scheme, 
NewBuy, on a number of its schemes and on the Government’s new Help to Buy scheme. 

Deposits are taken on all sales to mitigate the financial impact on the Group in the 
event that sales do not complete due to a lack of mortgage availability. 

An inability of customers to secure sufficient 
mortgage finance could have a direct impact on 
the Group’s transaction levels. 

52  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   52

22/07/2013   15:23

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 


TRADING & FINANCIAL REVIEW 

Risk Description 

SUSTAINABILITY 

Mitigation 

Berkeley is hugely aware of the environmental 
and social impact of the homes and communities 
that it builds, both during the construction 
phase and on occupation by its customers. 

Failure to address sustainability issues could 
affect the Group’s ability to acquire land, gain 
planning permission, manage sites effectively 
and respond to increasing customer demand  
for sustainable homes. 

Vision2020 provides the framework under which the Group’s approach to running a 
sustainable business is formalised. This provides a framework under which detailed 
commitments are set out to be adopted and embraced by all staff. 

A Board level Sustainability and Health & Safety Governance Committee has the 
responsibility of setting the Group’s direction in this area, to ensure that it is aligned 
with the Group’s strategy. 

Specific commitments to deliver sustainable communities, minimise the impact of the 
homes that Berkeley builds and to manage the environmental and social impacts of 
Berkeley’s business form the bedrock of this approach. Environmental and Social 
Sustainability assessments are built into land purchases and planning applications. 

Sustainability commitments during delivery include the use of environmental 
performance methodology, a focus on brownfield development and the monitoring 
of carbon emissions, amongst others. 

HEALTH AND SAFETY 

Berkeley’s operations have a direct impact on the 
health and safety of its people, contractors and 
members of the public. Berkeley considers this  
to be an area of critical importance. 

A lack of adequate procedures and systems to 
reduce the dangers inherent in the construction 
process increases the risk of accidents or 
site-related catastrophes, including fire and 
flood, which could result in serious injury or loss 
of life leading to reputational damage, financial 
penalties and disruption to operations. 

A Board level Sustainability / Health & Safety Governance Committee has the 
responsibility of setting the Group’s Health & Safety strategy. 

Dedicated Health & Safety teams are in place in each division and at Head Office. 
Procedures, training and reporting are all regularly reviewed to ensure high standards 
are maintained, and comprehensive accident investigation procedures are in place. 

The Group has implemented a number of initiatives to improve Health & Safety 
standards on site, with workshops held with contractors during the year. 

Vision2020 incorporates commitments in the area of Health & Safety which reinforce 
the Group’s focus on this. Adequate insurance is held to cover the risks inherent in 
large-scale construction projects. 

LAND AVAILABILITY 

An inability to source suitable land to maintain 
the Group’s land bank at appropriate margins in 
a highly competitive market could impact on the 
Group’s ability to deliver its corporate strategy. 

BUILD COST AND PROGRAMME 

Build costs are affected by the availability of 
skilled labour and the price and availability  
of materials. Changes to these prices and 
availability could impact on the profitability 
of each scheme. 

PRODUCT QUALITY 

Berkeley has a reputation for the high standards 
of quality of its product. If the Group fails to 
deliver against these standards, it could be 
exposed to reputational damage, as well as  
reduced sales and increased cost. 

Berkeley’s strategy is to acquire land opportunistically, where it meets its internal 
criteria for purchase. 

Land acquisition is focused on Berkeley’s core markets of London and the South of 
England, markets which it understands and where it believes that the demand 
fundamentals are strong. 

Each land acquisition is subject to formal internal appraisal and approval processes 
both prior to the submission of a bid and again prior to exchange of contracts. 

The Group maintains a land bank to mitigate against significant impacts from market 
changes or delayed build activity. Berkeley has experienced land teams with strong 
market knowledge in its areas of focus. 

A procurement and programming strategy for each development is agreed by the 
divisional Board before site acquisition. 

A further assessment of procurement and programming is undertaken and agreed by 
the divisional Board prior to the commencement of construction. 

Build cost reconciliations and build programme dates are presented and reviewed in 
detail at divisional cost review meetings each month. 

Detailed reviews are undertaken of the product on each scheme both during the 
acquisition of the site and throughout the build process to ensure that the quality  
of the product is maintained. 

Customer Satisfaction surveys are undertaken on the handover of all private 
apartments, and feedback incorporated in shaping the specification and quality 
of subsequent schemes. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L
R
E
V
E
W

I

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   53

22/07/2013   15:23

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

53 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
View of One Tower Bridge 
under construction 

54  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   54

22/07/2013   15:23

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

GOVERNANCE 

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   55

22/07/2013   15:23

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

55 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

BOARD OF DIRECTORS


Chairman and Executive Directors 

CURRENT COMMITTEE 
COMPOSITION 

Nomination Committee 
A W Pidgley (Chairman) 
D Howell 
J Armitt 
V Wadley 

Audit Committee 
D Howell (Chairman) 
A Nimmo 
G Barker 
V Wadley 

Remuneration Committee 
G Barker (Chairman) 
J Armitt 
A C Coppin 

Company Secretary 
A M Bradshaw 

Honorary Life President 
Jim Farrer MRICS, along 
with Tony Pidgley a 
co-founder of Berkeley, 
he was Group Chairman 
until his retirement in 
1992. At that time he was 
appointed Honorary 
Life President. 

56  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

TONY PIDGLEY CBE 
Co-founder of the Company 
in 1976 with Jim Farrer. He was 
appointed Group Chairman 
on 9 September 2009, having
previously been the Group 
Managing Director since the 
formation of the Group in 
1976. He is Chairman of the 
Nomination Committee. 

ROB PERRINS ACA 
Joined the Company in 1994 
having qualified as a chartered 
accountant with Ernst & Young 
in 1991. He was appointed to 
the Group Main Board on 1 May 
2001 on becoming Managing 
Director of Berkeley Homes plc. 
He became Group Finance 
Director on 2 November 2001, 
moving to his current role as 
Group Managing Director on 
9 September 2009. 

NICK SIMPKIN ACA 
Joined Berkeley in 2002 and has 
held a number of senior finance 
positions including Finance 
Director of St James and Head 
of Finance for Berkeley Group. 
He joined the Board and became 
Group Finance Director on 10 
September 2009. 

KARL WHITEMAN 
Joined Berkeley in 1996 as 
a Construction Director and 
currently leads the largest 
Berkeley Homes division and 
chairs the Group’s Sustainability 
and Health & Safety Working 
Groups. He joined the Board 
on 10 September 2009 as a 
Divisional Executive Director. 

SEAN ELLIS 
Joined Berkeley in 2004 
with an expertise in land 
and is currently Chairman 
of St James Group. He joined 
the Group Main Board on 
9 September 2010 as a 
Divisional Executive Director. 

GREG FRY ACA 
Joined the Group in 1982 and is 
currently Chairman of St George 
PLC, having been a Director 
since its inception in 1986. He 
was reappointed to the Group 
Main Board on 5 September 
2011 as a Divisional Executive 
Director, having previously been 
a member of the Group Main 
Board from 1 May 1996 to 
22 July 2010. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 


GOVERNANCE 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

Non-executive Directors 

SIR JOHN ARMITT 
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 1 October 2007 and 
became Deputy Chairman on 
5 September 2012. He is currently 
Chairman of the Olympic Delivery 
Authority, Chairman of National 
Express Group PLC, Chairman of 
City and Guilds and is a member 
of the Transport for London Board. 
From 2001 to 2007 he was Chief 
Executive of Network Rail and its 
predecessor, Railtrack. Sir John 
is the Senior Independent 
Director, Chairman of the Group’s 
Sustainability and Health & 
Safety Committee and is a 
member of the Remuneration 
and Nomination Committees. 

DAVID HOWELL FCA 
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director and Chairman of the 
Audit Committee on 25 February 
2004. Previously a Main Board 
Director of lastminute.com plc, 
Group Finance Director of First 
Choice Holidays plc, Executive 
Chairman of Western and 
Oriental plc, Chairman of EBTM 
plc (Everything but the Music) 
and a Non-executive Director 
of Nestor Healthcare Group plc, 
David is currently a Non-executive 
Director of four private companies. 
David is also a member of the 
Nomination Committee. 

ALAN COPPIN 
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 1 September 2006. 
He is currently a Non-executive 
Director of Marshalls plc and a 
member of both the Royal Air 
Force Board Standing Committee 
and Air Command (formerly 
Strike Command). Previously 
Hon. Chairman of The Prince’s 
Foundation for the Built 
Environment and a Non-executive 
Director at Capital and Regional 
plc and Carillion plc, Alan is a 
member of the Remuneration 
Committee. He will stand down 
from the Board at the AGM on 
2 September 2013. 

ALISON NIMMO CBE 
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 5 September 2011. 
Alison was appointed Chief 
Executive of The Crown Estate 
on 1 January 2012. Prior to that 
she led the design and delivery 
of the London 2012 Olympic and 
Paralympic venues as Director 
of Regeneration and Design at 
the Olympic Delivery Authority. 
She is a member of the Audit, 
Sustainability and Health 
& Safety Committees. 

VERONICA WADLEY 
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 3 January 2012. She 
is currently Chair of the Arts 
Council London, a Senior Adviser 
to the Mayor of London and a 
National Council member of Arts 
Council England. Previously 
Editor of The Evening Standard, 
she is also an Independent 
Director of Times Newspapers 
Holdings Ltd. She is a member 
of the Nomination and 
Audit Committees. 

GLYN BARKER BSC (HONS) FCA 
Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 3 January 2012 
following a 35 year career with 
PwC, most recently as its UK 
Vice Chairman. He previously 
held a number of senior posts 
within PwC including Managing 
Partner and Head of Assurance 
and also established and ran their 
Transactions Services business. 
Glyn is a Non-executive Director 
of Aviva plc and Transocean Ltd, 
Chairman of the Law Firm Irwin 
Mitchell LLP and a Director of 
the English National Opera. He 
is Chairman of the Remuneration 
Committee and a member of the 
Audit Committee. 

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

57 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
 

The Directors submit their report together with the audited consolidated and company financial statements for the year ended 30 April 2013. 

PRINCIPAL ACTIVITIES AND REVIEW OF THE BUSINESS 

The Company is a UK listed holding company of a Group engaged in residential-led property development focusing on urban regeneration and 
mixed-use developments. The Company is incorporated and domiciled in England and Wales and is quoted on the London Stock Exchange. 

The information that fulfils the requirements of the business review can be found in the Chairman’s Statement on page 3, the Managing Director’s 
Statement on page 5, the Trading and Financial Reviews on pages 41 to 51, which provide more detailed commentaries on the business during 
the year together with the outlook for the future, and the section on Running a Sustainable Business on pages 24 to 35. 

In addition, information in respect of the principal financial and operating risks of the business is set out in the Financial Review on pages 50 
and 51. 

TRADING RESULTS AND DIVIDENDS 

The Group’s consolidated profit after taxation for the financial year was £209.7m (2012: £158.1m). The Group’s joint ventures contributed a loss 
after taxation of £1.3m (2012: loss of £2.2m). 

An interim dividend of 15p per share was paid to shareholders on 19 April 2013. A further interim dividend of 59p per share is proposed, payable 
on 27 September 2013 to shareholders on the register on 30 August 2013. 

POST BALANCE SHEET EVENT 

During the year, the Company reached agreement to sell 534 HCA funded residential properties within its rental fund for £105.4 million. The 
properties are reported as £75.8 million of non-current assets held for resale at 30 April 2013. The transaction, which completed on 5 June 2013, 
will be reported in the results for the year ending 30 April 2014. 

SHARE CAPITAL 

The Company had 134,857,183 ordinary shares in issue at 30 April 2013 (2012: 134,857,183). The Company holds 3,577,506 of its own shares in 
treasury (2012: 3,577,506). 

Authority will be sought from shareholders at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting to renew the authority given at the 2012 Annual General 
Meeting for a further year, permitting the Company to purchase its own shares in the market up to a limit of 10% of its issued share capital. 

Movements in the Company’s share capital are shown in note 20 to the consolidated financial statements. 

Information on the Group’s share option schemes is set out in note 5 to the consolidated financial statements. Details of the Long-Term Incentive 
Schemes and Long-Term Incentive Plans for key executives are set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 61 to 77. 

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION 

The Articles of Association set out the basic management and administrative structure of the Company. They regulate the internal affairs of the 
Company and cover such matters as the issue and transfer of shares, Board and shareholder meetings, powers and duties of Directors and 
borrowing powers. In accordance with the Articles of Association, Directors can be appointed or removed by shareholders in a general meeting. 

The Articles may only be amended by special resolution at a general meeting of shareholders. Copies are available by writing to the Company 
Secretary and are also open to inspection at Companies House. 

DIRECTORS 

The Directors of the Company and their profiles are detailed on pages 56 and 57. All of these Directors served throughout the year under review. 
Victoria Mitchell stood down from the Board on 5 September 2012. 

The Articles of Association of the Company require Directors to submit themselves for re-election every three years. In addition all Directors are 
subject to re-election at the first opportunity after their appointment to the Board. However, in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance 
Code all the Directors will offer themselves for re-election at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting, other than Alan Coppin, who is standing 
down from the Board. 

The Directors’ interests in the share capital of the Company and its subsidiaries are shown in the Remuneration Report on page 77. At 30 April 
2013 each of the Executive Directors were deemed to have a non-beneficial interest in 237,363 (2012: 237,363) ordinary shares held by the Trustees 
of The Berkeley Group Employee Benefit Trust. 

There were no contracts of significance during, or at the end of, the financial year in which a Director of the Company is, or was, materially 
interested, other than those set out in note 27 to the consolidated financial statements, the contracts of employment of the Executive Directors, 
which are terminable within one year, and the appointment terms of the Non-executive Directors, which are renewable annually and terminable 
on one month’s notice. 

DIRECTORS’ INDEMNITIES 

The Company’s practice has always been to indemnify its Directors in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association and to the maximum 
extent permitted by law. Qualifying third party indemnities, under which the Company has agreed to indemnify the Directors, were in force during 
the financial year and at the date of approval of the financial statements, in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association and to the 
maximum extent permitted by law, in respect of all costs, charges, expenses, losses and liabilities, which they may incur in or about the execution 
of their duties to the Company, or any entity which is an associated company (as defined in Section 256 of the Companies Act 2006), or as a result 
of duties performed by the Directors on behalf of the Company or any such associated company. 

58  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

1_P10_BERK_AR13_Directors Report_58-60.indd   58

22/07/2013   16:50

 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

SUBSTANTIAL SHAREHOLDERS 

The Company has been notified of the following interests, pursuant to Rule 5 of the Disclosure Rules and Transparency Rules, as at 16 July 2013: 

First Eagle Investment Management, LLC 

BlackRock Inc. 

Standard Life Investments Ltd 

William Blair 

Lloyds Banking Group plc 

Anthony William Pidgley 

(1) Net of shares held in treasury. 

DONATIONS 

Number of ordinary 
shares held 

13,092,232 
6,699,472 
6,599,895 
6,553,042 
6,212,059 
5,602,350 

% of issued capital (1) 

Nature of holding 

9.97% 
5.10% 
5.03% 
4.99% 
4.73% 
4.27% 

Indirect 
Indirect 
Indirect/Direct 
Direct 
Indirect 
Direct 

During the year, donations by the Group for charitable purposes in the United Kingdom, including through the Berkeley Foundation, amounted 
to £0.9m (2012: £0.8m). The Group made no political contributions (2012: £nil) during the year. 

EMPLOYMENT POLICY 

The Group’s policy of operating through autonomous subsidiaries has ensured close consultation with employees on matters likely to affect their 
interests. The Group is firmly committed to the continuation and strengthening of communication lines with all its employees. 

An Equal Opportunities Policy was introduced in 2001. Following periodic reviews (the most recent in September 2010) the policy is now an 
Equality and Diversity Policy with the aim of ensuring that all employees, potential employees and other individuals receive equal treatment 
(including access to employment, training and opportunity for promotion) regardless of their age, disability, gender reassignment, marriage 
and civil partnership, pregnancy and maternity, race, religion or belief (including lack of belief), sex and sexual orientation. It is the policy of 
the Group to support the employment of people with disabilities wherever practicable and to ensure, as far as possible, the training, career 
development and promotion opportunities are available to all employees. This policy includes employees who become disabled whilst employed 
by the Group. 

SUSTAINABILITY 

The Group considers its approach to sustainability, defined as the effective management of environmental, social and economic risks and 
opportunities facing the company, to be an integral part of managing its business. Our framework for the business, Vision2020, sets out our 
integrated approach to managing sustainability within the context of the wider aims for the business. This approach is outlined within the Running 
a Sustainable Business section of this report and more extensive information is available on Berkeley’s website. This is the first year where we have 
provided integrated reporting on performance, with no stand alone sustainability report. We believe that this approach demonstrates how 
sustainability is embedded within the day-to-day operations of our business. 

We remain committed to enhancing the Group’s high standards through continuous improvement. Our Sustainability Governance Committee is 
responsible for setting the strategic objectives and the Main Board continues to monitor strategic development and progress against 
commitments and Key Performance Indicators. The Sustainability Working Group, comprising divisional executives and managers, is responsible 
for delivering these objectives and reviewing progress against targets. 

HEALTH AND SAFETY 

The Group considers the effective management of health and safety to be an integral part of managing its business. Accordingly, the Group Main 
Board continues to monitor the strategic development and audit the implementation by all divisions of their Occupational Health & Safety 
Management Systems to ensure that, both at Group and divisional level, they remain compliant with recognised established standards. 

We remain committed to enhancing the Group’s high standards through continuous improvement. Our Health & Safety Committee is responsible 
for setting the strategic objectives of the Group, and the Health & Safety Working Group, comprising divisional executives and managers, is 
responsible for delivering these objectives and reviewing progress against targets set for our established key performance indicators, reporting 
this quarterly to the Group Main Board. 

ESSENTIAL CONTRACTS 

Berkeley has contractual and other arrangements with numerous third parties in support of its business activities. None of the arrangements are 
individually considered to be essential to the business of Berkeley. 

PAYMENT OF CREDITORS 

Each of the Group’s operating companies is responsible for agreeing the terms and conditions, including terms of payment, relating to 
transactions with its suppliers. This is on an individual contract basis, rather than following a standard code. It is Group policy to abide by the 
agreed terms of payment where the supplier has provided the goods and services in accordance with the relevant terms and conditions of 
contract. At 30 April 2013, the Company did not have any trade creditors (2012: £nil). 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

1_P10_BERK_AR13_Directors Report_58-60.indd   59

22/07/2013   16:50

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

59 

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
 

TAKEOVER DIRECTIVE – AGREEMENTS 

Pursuant to the Companies Act 2006, the Company is required to disclose whether there are any significant agreements that take effect, alter or 
terminate upon a change of control. 

Change of control provisions are included as standard in many types of commercial agreement, notably bank facility agreements and joint venture 
shareholder agreements, for the protection of both parties. Such standard terms are included in Berkeley’s bank facility agreement which contains 
provisions that give the banks certain rights upon a change of control of the Company. Similarly, in certain circumstances, a change of control may 
give Berkeley’s joint venture partner, Prudential Assurance Company Limited, the ability to exercise certain rights under the shareholder 
agreement in relation to its St Edward Homes joint venture. 

In addition, the Company’s share schemes contain provisions which take effect upon change of control. These do not entitle the participants to a 
greater interest in the shares of the Company than that created by the initial grant of the award. The Company does not have any arrangements 
with any Director that provide compensation for loss of office or employment resulting from a takeover. 

The remaining information required to be disclosed under the Takeover Directive can be found within notes 5 and 20 to the consolidated financial 
statements. 

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS AND DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO AUDITORS 

Each of the persons who is a Director at the date of approval of this Annual Report confirms that: 

•	  So far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditors are unaware; and 

•	  The Director has taken all the steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director in order to make himself/herself aware of any relevant audit 

information and to establish that the Company’s auditors are aware of that information. 

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the Companies Act 2006. 

A resolution to re-appoint PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP as auditors to the Company will be proposed at the Annual General Meeting. 

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 

The Annual General Meeting of the Company is to be held at the Woodlands Park Hotel, Woodlands Lane, Stoke D’Abernon, Cobham, Surrey 
KT11 3QB at 11.00am on 2 September 2013. The Notice of Meeting, which is contained in a separate letter from the Group Chairman 
accompanying this report, includes a commentary on the business to be transacted at the Annual General Meeting. 

By order of the Board 

A M Bradshaw 
Company Secretary 
16 July 2013 

60  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

1_P10_BERK_AR13_Directors Report_58-60.indd   60

22/07/2013   16:50

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION REPORT
 

The Board of Directors presents its Remuneration Report for the year ended 30 April 2013, which has been prepared on the recommendation of 
the Remuneration Committee (“the Committee”). An advisory resolution to approve this report will be proposed at the Annual General Meeting 
of the Company at which the financial statements will be approved. 

The report has been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the UK Corporate Governance Code, Schedule 8 of the Large & 
Medium-Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008, and the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority. 

INTRODUCTION 

Berkeley’s strategy places an emphasis on achieving two operational measures with which the Committee aims to align to the Executive’s 
remuneration. The first is achieving superior and sustainable pre-tax returns on shareholder equity (“ROE”). The second is enhancing the value of 
the land bank. The combination of these two targets is designed to provide a balance between earnings in the near term and creating a long 
term, sustainable business. 

In considering the level of the Executive’s Annual Bonus Plan the Committee has discussed the principles with major shareholders and aims to set 
these at a level that is both challenging and sector leading. The Group’s ROE compared with the sector over the last six years illustrates the 
relative performance of Berkeley: 

Company 

Berkeley 

Sector highest 

Sector lowest 

Sector average (excluding Berkeley) 

Return on Equity 

2007/08 

2008/09 

2009/10 

2010/11 

2011/12 

2012/13 

26.6% 

26.6% 

(0.7%) 

18.2% 

16.2% 

16.2% 

(73.4%) 

(26.0%) 

13.3% 

13.3% 

(44.2%) 

(18.1%) 

15.3% 

15.3% 

(6.2%) 

1.0% 

21.2% 

21.2% 

(0.4%) 

4.8% 

22.4% 

22.4% 

3.4% 

8.5% 

The Committee sets annual targets that have a strong operational correlation with the performance of the business. Whilst the Committee 
considers total shareholder return (TSR) to be a helpful tool to measure performance over the long term, it believes that setting the right 
operational targets on an annual basis and putting in place a long term share based remuneration policy aligned to creating shareholder value 
above a hurdle level of return is the best way to deliver value for shareholders and to encourage, reward and retain the current Executives. 

The TSR for Berkeley, expressed as the value of £100 invested in the Company, both from 25 June 2004, being the date on which the previous 
Scheme of Arrangement and consequential returns of surplus capital to shareholders was announced, and from 1 May 2010, the date on which 
the current Annual Bonus Plan was introduced, to 30 April 2013 is as follows: 

Company 

Berkeley 

FTSE 250 

FTSE 100 

Barratt 

Bellway 

Bovis 

Persimmon 

Redrow 

Taylor Wimpey 

Sector average (excluding Berkeley) 

Value of £100 invested on 

25/06/2004 

01/05/2010 

£526 

£298 

£197 

£101 

£230 

£183 

£245 

£97 

£63 

£153 

£252 

£150 

£129 

£250 

£189 

£186 

£252 

£143 

£233 

£209 

Berkeley has consistently out-performed the sector average and generated additional value for shareholders over a difficult and challenging 
period. 

At the 2011 AGM shareholders approved the Board’s strategy to return £1.7 billion (£13 per share) to shareholders over the next 10 years, which 
has the following key features: 

•	 It strikes the right balance between maximising shareholder returns and an acceptable level of operating risk; 

•	 It provides a long term framework which has embedded flexibility between investment and cash and takes into account the cyclical nature of 

the property market; 

•	 It allows Berkeley to operate at its natural size; 

•	 The model provides a performance stretch relative to the sector; 

•	 It supports an added value model which the Board believes delivers best returns to shareholders over the long term; and 

•	 Berkeley can generate the returns without introducing unnecessary financial risk in a cyclical market. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   61

22/07/2013   16:56

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

61 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION REPORT
 

KEY ELEMENTS OF THE REMUNERATION POLICY 

The objective of Berkeley’s remuneration policy is to encourage, reward and retain the current Executives and ensure their actions are aligned with 
the Company’s strategy. The core philosophies of the policy are: 

Fixed remuneration 
The Committee sets salaries for the Executive Directors based on their experience, role, individual and corporate performance. Salaries on 
appointment to the Board are set at a lower quartile level of the comparator group which, based on appropriate levels of individual and corporate 
performance, will be increased with experience gained over time. 

Annual performance related pay 
The Committee believes that shareholders’ interests are best served by remuneration packages that have a large emphasis on 
performance-related pay which encourage the Executives to focus on delivering the business strategy. 

The chart below summarises the relative importance of the various components of annual remuneration for each Executive Director for 2012/13, 
illustrating that the majority of this remuneration is performance related: 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

0% 

10% 

20% 

30% 

Fixed: 
Salary 

Benefits 

Pensions 

40% 

50% 
Performance related: 
Annual Bonus Plan 

60% 

The Committee is responsible for determining the performance measures, annual performance targets and bonus awards under the Annual 
Bonus Plan. 

The specific performance measures under the Annual Bonus Plan, being a return based measure (Return on Equity) and a value based measure 
(Land Bank Growth) ensure that there is a balance between incentivising the Executives to provide a sustainable ongoing level of return to 
shareholders whilst ensuring the long-term sustainability of the Company, thereby creating long-term shareholder value. 

The performance targets are set on an annual basis taking into account the above considerations and reflecting an appropriate level of risk. 

Long-term sustainable performance 
The long-term incentives which extend to 2021 have been designed to lock-in the Executive team for a far longer period than is typical in most 
publicly listed companies. This helps to ensure that the Executive team are focused on generating long-term sustainable value for shareholders, 
not just on meeting short term performance targets. 

The chart below sets out the proportion of annual to long term remuneration of the Executive Directors: 

0% 

10% 

20% 

30% 

40% 

50% 

60% 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

Annual 

Long term 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

62  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   62

22/07/2013   16:56

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

The Company’s long term incentive plans are designed to align the interests of shareholders and the Executive Directors over the long term. They 
are summarised below: 

2009 LTIP 
This was approved by over 85% of shareholders at an EGM in April 2009, and incorporates two parts: 

a.  Part A – replacing the balance of the shares originally awarded under the previous 2004(b) LTIP, exercisable on 31 January 2014 subject to 

continued employment with the Company and an exercise price of £2.85 per share 

b.  Part B – requiring maintaining a minimum net asset per share of £5.94 over a six year period, vesting in two equal tranches on 15 April 2015 and 

2016 with an exercise price of £8.25 per share 

2011 LTIP 
This is a ten year plan introduced in September 2011, and amended at the 2012 Annual General Meeting, to support the Company’s long term 
plan to return £1.7 billion to shareholders, representing 183% of the Net Assets per Share at 30 April 2011 (£7.09/share), through a combination of 
dividends (£13 per share) and share buybacks, by September 2021. This plan was approved by over 91% of shareholders at the 2011 Annual 
General Meeting and the amendment approved by over 92% of shareholders at the 2012 Annual General Meeting. 

The plan aims to make significant returns to shareholders in cash over a sustained period, ensuring the Group remains at the right size and 
balances investment and returns to shareholders. 

These plans are set out in more detail later in this report. 

Risk adjustment 
The Company’s reward arrangements should contain the following elements of risk adjustment, in line with best practice: 

a.  a focus on long-term sustainable performance – this is set out above. 

b.  the weighting of the reward package towards building substantial equity holdings which the Executive team are required to earn and hold over 

long periods: 

–	  The final shares from the previous 2004(b) LTIP will not vest and sale restrictions be fully removed until 31 January 2014, ten years after
 

awards were granted under the Plan.
 

–	  The 2009 LTIP provides longer than market standard vesting periods – for example options granted in 2009 under Part B of this Plan will vest 
50% on 15 April 2015 and the balance on 15 April 2016 subject to the Net Asset Value per share being a minimum of £5.94 at the first of 
these two dates. 

c.  the deferral of a significant proportion of annual incentive awards and clawback where there is a material deterioration in performance: 

– 	  The Annual Bonus Plan, whilst based on annual performance periods: 

• 

• 

defers 50% of a rolling balance each year in notional shares until the final payments are made at the end of a five year period; and 

ensures that 50% of these rolling balances are at material risk each year due to forfeiture if minimum threshold levels of performance set in 
each year are not achieved. 

d.  no reward for failure: 

–	  Under the 2011 LTIP all options lapse, no shares vest and the LTIP terminates on 1 October 2015 if £568.7 million has not been distributed to 

shareholders by 30 September 2015. 

Substantial equity holdings 
In order to align the interests of Executives and shareholders, the reward strategy is designed so that, provided performance is delivered, the 
Executive team become material (in relation to their overall compensation) shareholders in the Company. 

The current shareholdings of the Executive Directors as a percentage of salary, based on the share price at 30 April 2013, are set out on page 71 of 
this report. 

REMUNERATION REVIEW 

The Committee reviews on an annual basis whether its remuneration policy remains appropriate for the relevant financial year. Factors taken into 
account by the Committee include: 

•	  market conditions affecting the Company; 

•	  the recruitment market in the Company’s sector, other comparable companies and the FTSE 250; 

•	  aligning remuneration to the corporate strategy and delivering value to shareholders by encouraging long-term sustainable performance; 

•	  changing market practice; and 

•	  changing views of institutional shareholders and their representative bodies and Corporate Governance best practice. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   63

22/07/2013   16:56

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

63 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION REPORT
 

There have been no changes to the policy following the review in the year, with the only changes to individual remuneration being in respect of 
salaries as set below. 

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE 

Composition and role 
At 30 April 2013, the Committee comprised of three Independent Non-executive Directors, Alan Coppin (Chairman), Sir John Armitt and Glyn 
Barker. Glyn Barker was appointed to the Committee on 13 June 2012 and David Howell retired from the Committee on the same date. Glyn 
Barker became Chairman of the Committee on 14 June 2013. 

During the year the Committee met on two occasions and there were no absences. 

The members of the Committee have no personal financial interest, other than as shareholders, in matters to be decided, no potential conflicts of 
interest arising from cross directorships and no day-to-day involvement in running the business. 

The Committee is able to seek independent advice at the expense of the Company; no advice has been sought by the Committee during the 
year under review. 

In determining the Executive Directors’ remuneration for the year, the Committee consulted with the Group Chairman, Tony Pidgley, the Group 
Managing Director, Rob Perrins and the Group Finance Director, Nick Simpkin. No Director played a part in any discussion about his own 
remuneration. In addition, the Committee had access to information on executive reward provided to the Board by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, 
who acquired Halliwell Consulting, the previous advisers, in December 2008 and who have extensive knowledge of the Group and its structure. 

The Executive Directors hold no external appointments. 

The key responsibilities of the Committee are to: 

•	  determine and agree with the Board the broad policy for the remuneration of the Executive Directors. This includes salary, annual bonus 

plans, share options, other share based incentives and pensions; 

•	  determine the performance targets for the Annual Bonus Plan operated by the company and approve the total annual payments made under 

this plan; 

•	  determine all share incentive plans for approval by the Board and shareholders; 

•	  take into account the views of shareholders when determining plans under the remuneration policy; 

•	  ensure that the contractual terms on termination, and any payments made, are fair to the individual and the Company and that failure is 

not rewarded; and 

•	  note annually the remuneration trends and any major changes in employee benefit structures across the Company or Group. 

The Committee has formal terms of reference which describes its full remit. This can be downloaded from the section dealing with Investor 
Relations on the Berkeley website (www.berkeleygroup.co.uk). 

REMUNERATION POLICY FOR 2012/13 AND 2013/14 

The policy is to set the main elements of the Executive Directors’ remuneration package against the following quartiles in the Company’s 
comparator group: 

Base salary 	

Experience and Role 

Annual bonus 

Upper decile 

Pension 

Benefits in kind 

Share incentives 

Lower quartile  

Market practice 

Upper decile 

For the purposes of benchmarking remuneration the Committee used the following comparator group of companies in the year ended 30 April 
2013: 

Company name 

Amec PLC 

Balfour Beatty PLC 

Bellway PLC 

Marshalls PLC 

Taylor Wimpey PLC 

Bovis Homes Group PLC 

Persimmon PLC 

Travis Perkins PLC 

Barratt Developments PLC 

Carillion PLC 

Redrow PLC 

The Committee also considers the remuneration in the FTSE 250 as an additional benchmark to the main comparator group set out above due to 
its relatively small number of constituent companies. 

64  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   64

22/07/2013   16:56

 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

BALANCE BETWEEN FIXED AND VARIABLE PERFORMANCE BASED PAY 

The charts below demonstrate the balance between fixed and variable performance based pay for each Executive for the 2012/13 financial year 
on an annualised basis. 

A W Pidgley 
Chairman 

R C Perrins 
Group Managing 
Director 

N G Simpkin 
Group Finance 
Director 

G J Fry 
Divisional Director 

K Whiteman 
Divisional Director 

S Ellis 
Divisional Director 

10% 

11% 

16% 

16% 

22% 

21% 

90% 

89% 

84% 

84% 

78% 

79% 

FIXED PERFORMANCE 
– Salary 	
– Benefits (including pension 	

VARIABLE PERFORMANCE 
– Bonus earned 
– Fair value of LTIPs


 contribution/allowance) 

(annualised) 


ELEMENTS OF EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION 

BASIC SALARY 

The Committee has historically set the salary of the Chairman, Tony Pidgley, at the upper decile against the Company’s comparator group 
reflecting the Committee’s view that he is one of the most experienced individuals within the sector and that he possesses unique experience 
within the industry.
 

The Committee has taken account of the following factors in setting individual salary levels:
 

•	  the individual Executive Director’s experience and responsibilities; 

•	  the levels of base salary for similar positions with comparable status, responsibility and skills in organisations of broadly similar size and 

complexity, in particular those companies within the comparator group, other comparable companies and the FTSE 250; 

•	  the performance of the individual Executive Director and the Group; and 

•	  the pay and conditions throughout the Group. 

On appointment to the Board and promotion, the Committee sets salaries at a lower quartile level which, based on appropriate levels of 
individual and corporate performance, will be increased with experience gained over time. 

The salaries for 2013/14 are set out below: 

Executive 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

2012/13 
Salary 

£780,000 

£470,000 

£312,000 

£325,000 

£305,000 

£305,000 

2013/14
Salary 

£800,000 

£484,000 

£321,000 

£334,000 

£314,000 

£314,000 

% rise 

2.6% 

3.0% 

2.9% 

2.8% 

3.0% 

3.0% 

Lower
Quartile 

£401,000 

£408,000 

£270,000 

£247,000 

£247,000 

£247,000 

FTSE 250 

Median 

£489,000 

£491,000 

£324,000 

£307,000 

£307,000 

£307,000 

Upper 
Quartile 

£585,000 

£584,000 

£386,000 

£372,000 

£372,000 

£372,000 

The increases agreed by the Committee for the Executive Directors reflects the Committee’s policy of increasing individual Director salaries over 
time to reflect their experience, performance and the performance of the Group. 

In reviewing the salaries of the Executive Directors, the Committee has also taken account of the employment conditions and salary increases 
awarded to employees throughout the Group, which were on average 5.3% this year. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   65

22/07/2013   16:56

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

65 

 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION REPORT
 

ANNUAL PERFORMANCE-RELATED BONUS 

The Berkeley Group Holdings plc Bonus Plan 
Overview of the Bonus Plan 
•	  At the beginning of the plan period of five financial years, participants will have a plan account to which Company contributions 

will be made. 

•	  No Company contribution will be made to a participant’s plan account unless the annual performance criteria are met. 

•	  The Company contribution will be set annually as a percentage of salary for each Executive. 

•	  There will be two types of performance condition, Group and Divisional. The Group performance condition will be a matrix of Return on 
Equity (“ROE”) and Land Bank Growth. The Divisional performance condition will be based upon Divisional Profit before Tax (“PBT”). 

•	  Having regard to the strategy of the Company, the Committee will set: 

–	 

the performance levels (including minimum performance thresholds) for the performance conditions for each plan year; and 

– 	 the maximum annual Company contribution for each participant for the plan year. 

•	  These criteria will be disclosed in full in the relevant Committee report along with the annual contributions earned and deferred balances 

for each participant. 

•	  Where the minimum threshold performance criteria on both measures are not achieved, 50% of the deferred balance in a participant’s plan 

account will be forfeited. 

•	  Participants will be entitled to an annual payment of 50% of their plan account at the end of each financial year. All balances will be 

deferred in shares or notional shares. At the end of the five year plan period 100% of the balance of participants’ accounts will be paid. 

Key features of the Bonus Plan 
The Committee designed the Bonus Plan based on the following rationale: 

Two targets – the balance between operating a return based measure (“ROE”) and a value based measure (“Land Bank Growth”) should ensure 
that the Executives are incentivised to provide a sustainable ongoing level of return to shareholders whilst ensuring the long-term sustainability of 
the Company, as follows: 

•	  the Bonus Plan incentivises the delivery of increased profits in order to achieve ROE at the same time as growing the land bank. It should be 
noted that the ROE will be set from a challenging base as the Company has not needed to take any land write downs as is the case with the 
majority of its competitors; 

•	  ROE is a compound measure and therefore if shareholder funds are reinvested and not paid as dividends, earnings growth will be 

compounded to achieve the targets; 

•	  the fact that the Bonus Plan targets also include growth in the land bank value, means that Executives are encouraged to acquire land in the 

current market on favourable terms as well as maximise sustainable profit growth; and 

•	  ROE as a measure highlights the inefficiency of retaining surplus cash on the balance sheet. In order to deliver the targeted level of returns, this 

will encourage the Company to invest or return cash to shareholders. 

Level of targets – the Committee incentivises the Executives to achieve a good level of returns to shareholders whilst ensuring the long-term 
sustainability of the Company. Therefore the targets set have to take into account an appropriate level of risk. The Bonus Plan allows a close 
tailoring by the Committee of the performance conditions to the budget and performance of the Company for each financial year. 

At the outset of the Plan, the Committee set the annual performance requirements targeting an average ROE of 12.5% p.a. and average Land 
Bank Growth of 10% p.a. over the full five years of the plan, which were considered challenging and stretching targets at that time, effectively 
doubling pre tax profits and growing the land bank gross margin to £3 billion over this period. 

Over the course of the Plan there is likely to be annual variability in the performance requirements actually set to reflect the environment at the 
time (see performance targets for 2012/13 and 2013/14 operation of the plan set out later in this report). These are reviewed each year by the 
Committee to ensure that they are appropriate to the current market conditions and position of the Company, so that they continue to remain 
challenging and fully aligned to the strategy of the Group. 

The maximum performance targets set and actual performance over the first three years of the plan are set out below: 

2010/11 

2011/12 

2012/13 

Return on Equity 	

Land Bank growth 

Target 

13.5% 

16.5% 

18.5% 

Actual 

15.3% 

21.2% 

22.4% 

Target 

10.0% 

8.0% 

10.0% 

Actual 

13.1% 

12.0% 

10.5% 

In respect of the Return on Equity target, if Berkeley had performed at the median of its competitors for these years, then no bonuses would have 
been awarded to the Executive Directors. 

66  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   66

22/07/2013   16:56

	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

Level of awards – the proposed maximum award bonus potential is 300% of salary; however, because 50% of the balance on the plan account is 
deferred, the actual annual payment profile, based on, maximum awards each year and 100% satisfaction of both performance conditions, would 
be: 

Year 1 	

150% 	

Year 2 

225% 

Year 3 

262.5% 

Year 4 

281% 

Year 5 

581% 

Risk adjustment – there is a risk adjustment mechanism built into the operation of the Bonus Plan with a claw back of contributions if the 
threshold levels of ROE and Land Bank Growth are not met for any financial year during the five years of operation of the Bonus Plan. This 
adjustment mechanism ensures: 

•	 performance must be maintained over the five years of operation of the Bonus Plan or the value in the participant’s plan account will not 

increase; and 

•	 if there is a material deterioration in performance there is a claw back of 50% of the balance of the participant’s account. 

Operation of the Bonus Plan for the year ended 30 April 2013 
The bonus payable to each of the Group Chairman, Group Managing Director and Group Finance Director is determined by reference to the 
Group performance condition. For the Divisional Directors, 50% of the potential bonus payable is determined by reference to the Group 
performance condition and 50% by reference to the Divisional PBT performance condition. 

The maximum bonus potential for the year ended 30 April 2013 is set out in the table below: 

Maximum Potential (% age of Salary) 

300% 

300% 

220% 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

175% 

K Whiteman 

175% 

S Ellis 

175% 

The following tables set out: 

•	  the performance conditions for the Bonus Plan for the year ended 30 April 2013; 

•	  the level of satisfaction of those performance conditions. 

Group performance condition (year ended 30 April 2013) 

Performance Requirement Matrix 

Land Bank Growth 

Target 

Target 

Factor 

<13.5% 

0% 

0% 

0.0% 

Bonus Plan 
Deduction 

2% 

4% 

6% 

8% 

10% 

50.0% 

62.5% 

75.0% 

87.5% 

100.0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

13.5% 

14.5% 

15.5% 

16.5% 

17.5% 

18.5% 

50% 

60% 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

25% 

30% 

35% 

40% 

45% 

50% 

31% 

38% 

44% 

50% 

56% 

63% 

38% 

45% 

53% 

60% 

68% 

75% 

44% 

53% 

61% 

70% 

79% 

88% 

50% 

60% 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

y
t
i
u
q
E
n
o
n
r
u
t
e
R

Notes: 

1  The matrix shows the percentage of each of the performance requirements for a given level of performance and the corresponding percentage of the targeted 

maximum annual bonus potential earned for 2012/13. 

2	  There will be straight line bonus vesting between points. 

3  If the minimum threshold levels for either are not met, no contribution is made to the Bonus Plan account. If the minimum threshold levels of performance are 
not met for both performance conditions, 50% of the participant’s plan account will be forfeited. Structuring the performance conditions in this way will ensure 
consistent levels of ROE at the same time as the Group invests and adds value to the land bank. 

4	  ROE is defined as profit before tax divided by average shareholders’ funds. 

5	  Land Bank Growth is defined as the annual percentage increase in the development margin in the land bank. This is the anticipated future gross margin to be 
earned from plots controlled and included in the Group’s land bank. To be included in the land bank, management must have reasonable certainty that the 
plots will come forward for development, either benefiting from a planning consent or being on land zoned for development. For the avoidance of doubt, the 
land bank excludes plots subject to strategic land options. Calculated plot by plot, the development margin is measured on a consistent basis according to 
prevailing sales prices for revenue, historic cost for costs already incurred and prevailing prices for costs still to be incurred. It is separately disclosed within the 
annual report. Each year the land bank gross margin is reduced naturally by the amount of gross margin sold in the year. Therefore, zero % growth in the land 
bank means that replacement matches usage. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   67

22/07/2013   16:56

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

67 

	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION REPORT
 

Divisional PBT performance condition (year ended 30 April 2013) 
The Divisional PBT targets are set at the beginning of the financial year at a level which is challenging taking into account the potential level of 
bonus payments, the market, development availability and other relevant issues. 

Level of satisfaction of performance conditions (year ended 30 April 2013) 

Group 

0.0% 

10.0% 

10.5%  Land bank growth 

13.5% 

18.5% 

22.4%  ROE 

Threshold 

Maximum 

Out performance 

The Group performance conditions are therefore met in full. 

Divisional 
The level of Divisional PBT performance for 2012/13 against target is as follows: 

Division 

St George 

Berkeley Homes Urban Renaissance 

St James Group 

Level of actual performance 
as a percentage of target 

Percentage of bonus 
 element earned 

100% 

50% 

100% 

100% 

50% 

100% 

Level of bonus earned in respect of the year ended 30 April 2013 
The bonus earned for the year ended 30 April 2013, as a result of performance against the Group and Divisional performance conditions, is set 
out in the table below: 

Bonus earned (% age of Salary) 

300% 

300% 

220% 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

175% 

K Whiteman 

131.25% 

S Ellis 

175% 

It should be noted that under the Bonus Plan only 50% of the cumulative balance of a participant’s account is paid at the end of the relevant year 
with the balance deferred in shares. See page 75 of the Report for details of the Plan accounts for each Executive Director. 

Operation of the Bonus Plan for year ending 30 April 2014 
The bonus payable to each of the Group Chairman, Group Managing Director and Group Finance Director is determined by reference to the 
Group performance condition. For the Divisional Directors, 50% of the potential bonus payable is determined by reference to the Group 
performance condition and 50% by reference to the Divisional PBT performance condition. 

The maximum bonus potential for the year ending 30 April 2014 is set out in the table below: 

Maximum Potential (% age of Salary) 

300% 

300% 

220% 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

175% 

K Whiteman 

175% 

S Ellis 

175% 

68  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   68

22/07/2013   16:56

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

The performance conditions for the Bonus Plan for the year ending 30 April 2014 are set out below. 

Group performance condition (year ending 30 April 2014) 

Performance Requirement Matrix 

Land Bank Growth 

Target 

Target 

Factor 

<15.0% 

0% 

<1% 

0.0% 

Bonus Plan 
Deduction 

1% 

2% 

3% 

4% 

5% 

50.0% 

62.5% 

75.0% 

87.5% 

100.0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

15.0% 

16.0% 

17.0% 

18.0% 

19.0% 

20.0% 

50% 

60% 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

25% 

30% 

35% 

40% 

45% 

50% 

31% 

38% 

44% 

50% 

56% 

63% 

38% 

45% 

53% 

60% 

68% 

75% 

44% 

53% 

61% 

70% 

79% 

88% 

50% 

60% 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

y
t
i
u
q
E
n
o
n
r
u
t
e
R

The ROE maximum performance target for the year ending 30 April 2014 has been increased from 18.5% to 20.0%, with a corresponding 
reduction in the maximum performance target for land bank growth from 10.0% to 5.0%, reflecting the balance between a sustainable ongoing 
level of return to shareholders and long term sustainability of the Company. 

Divisional PBT performance condition (year ending 30 April 2014) 
The Divisional PBT targets are set at the beginning of the financial year at a level which is challenging taking into account the potential level of 
bonus payments, the market, development availability and other relevant issues. 

BENEFITS IN KIND 

In line with market practice, the Company’s policy is to provide Executive Directors with the following additional benefits: 

•	 a fully expensed company car or cash allowance alternative; and 

•	 medical insurance. 

PENSION 

Messrs Pidgley, Perrins and Whiteman receive payments in lieu of pension at 17%, 17% and 15% of base salary respectively. Messrs Simpkin, Fry 
and Ellis receive a 15% pension contribution. 

All payments in lieu of pension are subject to income tax and national insurance. These payments are not included in salary figures for the 
purposes of determining any other benefit entitlement. 

Full details of pension costs for Executive Directors are set out in the audited section of the report on page 75. 

LONG TERM REMUNERATION 

This section of the report sets out the share incentives for the year ended 30 April 2013. 

On 15 April 2009, at an Extraordinary General Meeting of the Company, over 85% of shareholders approved the introduction of The Berkeley 
Group Holdings plc 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan, which incorporated and replaced Element 2 of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc 2004(b) 
Long-Term Incentive Plan (the “2004(b) LTIP”) and the previously approved 2007 LTIP, as set out below. 

2009 LTIP PART A 

The balance of the shares originally awarded under the 2004(b) LTIP (i.e. 3/12 of the shares), totalling 5,330,340 shares, were replaced by options 
with an exercise price of £3 per share granted under the 2009 LTIP. This new option is identified as Part A of the 2009 LTIP. These options were 
awarded on 29 June 2009, at which time the Element 2 awards under the 2004(b) LTIP were surrendered. 

4,441,950 options are currently outstanding, which will become exercisable on 31 January 2014 subject to the relevant Executive’s continued 
employment with the Company. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   69

22/07/2013   16:56

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

69 

 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION REPORT
 

2009 LTIP PART B 

Following shareholder approval on 15 April 2009, a maximum of 7,100,000 shares were capable of being granted under Part B of the 2009 LTIP. 
The grants under Part B of the 2009 LTIP are market priced options which will vest subject to: 

•	  continued employment to the relevant vesting date; and 

•	  the satisfaction of the underpin condition that Net Assets Per Share are at least £5.94 at 15 April 2015. 

•	  Vesting of these options will be in two tranches: 

– 

50% on 15 April 2015; and 

–  50% on 15 April 2016. 

A total of 6,120,000 options are outstanding. 

Shareholder approval was received at the 2011 AGM to amend the rules of the 2009 LTIP (covering both Part A and Part B) so that the terms of 
existing options granted can be adjusted in the event of the payment of a cash dividend or dividend in specie. This provides that where such a 
dividend is paid the adjustment will be a reduction in the exercise price of an option by the amount or value of the dividend provided that the 
exercise price can never be less than zero and a reduction will only be made to the exercise price of an option that is not then capable of exercise. 

2011 LTIP 

The Company announced in June 2011 as part of a strategic review of the business a long term plan to return approximately £1.7 billion to 
shareholders over the next 10 years. A new long term remuneration plan was proposed to support this strategy, the 2011 Long Term Incentive 
Plan (“2011 LTIP”), which was approved by over 91% of shareholders at the Annual General Meeting in September 2011. 

The rules of the plan were subsequently amended, and approved by over 92% of shareholders at the 2012 Annual General Meeting, to allow the 
returns to be made through a combination of dividends (£13 per share) and share buy backs (“distributions”). The cumulative distributions 
required by the plan on or before the relative milestone dates are set out below: 

30 September 2015 

30 September 2018 

30 September 2021 

The key features of the 2011 LTIP are: 

Cumulative Distributions 

£568.7m 

£1,136.1m 

£1,703.6m 

•	  if the Company returns £1.7 billion to shareholders over a ten year period via a series of dividend payments (£13 per share) and share buy backs 
by the dates referred to above, participants will be entitled to exercise options and receive a number of ordinary shares in the capital of the 
Company at the end of the ten year period. 

•	  the maximum number of shares capable of being earned by all participants are 19,616,503 shares, being 13% of the fully diluted share capital 

of the Company at the date of approval of the plan. These are set out by participant in the table below: 

Participant 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

Total 

Position 

Chairman 

Group Managing Director 

Group Finance Director 

Divisional Director 

Divisional Director 

Divisional Director 

Number of shares subject to award 

5,000,000 

5,000,000 

3,250,000 

1,866,503 

2,250,000 

2,250,000 

19,616,503 

•	  the exercise price of options granted under the 2011 LTIP will be £13 per share less an amount equal to the value of all dividends paid between 

the date of approval of the 2011 LTIP and 30 September 2021, provided the exercise price cannot be less than zero. 

70  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   70

22/07/2013   16:56

	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
  
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

The following table sets out the cumulative distributions, the relevant dates and the consequences of failing to deliver these distributions by these 
relevant dates: 

Required date 

Cumulative 
dividend 
(on or before 
required date) 

Consequences of failing to make the cumulative dividend payments on or before the  
required date 

30 September 2015 

£568.7m 

Options lapse, no shares vest and 2011 LTIP terminates on 1 October 2015. 

30 September 2018 

£1,136.1m 

Where the cumulative distributions on or before 30 September 2018 is less than £1,136.1m, the following 
process determines the number of shares vesting:­

1 The number of shares capable of vesting is calculated on the level of dividend paid and capable of being 

paid as at 30 September 2018. 

2 The exercise price of the shares capable of vesting is set by reducing the original exercise price of £13 by 

the level of cumulative dividend actually paid on or before 30 September 2021. 

3  No shares will vest until the end of the 2011 LTIP period on 30 September 2021 subject to the 

participant’s continued employment at this date. 

For example:­

A participant is granted an award over 3 million shares 

On 30 September 2018 it is determined that an additional £3 per share is capable of being paid as well as 
the actual payments made on or before 30 September 2015 of £4.34; giving a total of £7.34. 

Therefore the number of shares capable of vesting on 30 September 2021 is as follows:­

3 million shares x £7.34 = 1,693,846 shares 

£13 

with an exercise price initially per share of £8.66 (£13 – £4.34). 

If, however, the actual dividend payments made on or before 30 September 2021 exceed £4.34 the exercise 
price will be reduced to £13 minus the actual level of dividends paid. For example if the actual dividend 
paid was £10 the exercise price would reduce to £3 (£13 - £10). The number of shares capable of vesting 
would, however, remain unchanged with the balance incapable of vesting having lapsed on 1 October 2018. 

30 September 2021 

£1,703.6m 

The process is the same as above with the relevant date being 30 September 2021. 

£1,703.6m paid in 
full prior to 30 
September 2021 
(including £13/share 
in dividends) 

£1,703.6m 

In circumstances where £1,703.6m of cumulative distributions (including £13/share in 
dividends) are made prior to 30 September 2021 awards shall vest in full. 

Participants will be able to exercise their awards of options from the date this cumulative 
target is met and may also sell any shares necessary to pay their tax liability on exercise. 

In respect of the balance of their shares participants shall only be able to sell a maximum of 
10% p.a. of this balance until 30 September 2021 at which date the sale restrictions shall 
lapse. 

OTHER SENIOR EMPLOYEES OF THE COMPANY 

The Company’s business comprises of a number of operating Divisions. The Committee in conjunction with the Board has, therefore, 
implemented both annual and longer term cash based compensation arrangements for these other senior employees of the Company linked to 
the performance of the relevant Division for which they work. Some elements of the cash bonus plans are annual while other elements are 
deferred to ensure long-term consistent delivery by each Division. The Committee, in line with best practice, continually reviews with the Board 
the policy behind the compensation plans at this level in the Company to ensure they remain appropriate to the market and the Company’s 
current circumstances. It is the view of both the Committee and the Board as a whole that these arrangements are very effective at ensuring the 
delivery of Divisional performance for which these senior employees are responsible. Both the Committee and the Board believe that having 
senior employees focused on the delivery of Divisional results is an excellent way of driving shareholder value. 

A number of senior employees of the Company have also been granted awards under the 2009 LTIP Part B. 

SHAREHOLDING REQUIREMENT 

The Company has a shareholding requirement for both Executive and Non-executive Directors and these requirements and the actual 
shareholdings of the Executive and Non-executive Directors as at 30 April 2013 are set out in the following tables: 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

Shareholder requirements as a % age of 
salary to be met within 5 years of appointment 

Current shareholding as a % age of salary 
(based on 30 April 2013 share price) 

400% 

200% 

200% 

200% 

200% 

200% 

14,976% 

5,330% 

180% 

6,348% 

245% 

68% 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   71

22/07/2013   16:56

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

71 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION REPORT
 

Shareholder requirements as a % age of net 
fees to be met within 3 years of appointment 

Current shareholding as a % age of net fees  
(based on 30 April 2013 share price) 

DILUTION 

J Armitt 

D Howell 

A C Coppin 

A Nimmo 

G Barker 

V Wadley 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

328% 

396% 

213% 

131% 

510% 

144% 

The 2009 LTIP and 2011 LTIP were special arrangements, approved by shareholders at the EGM in April 2009 and AGM in September 2011 
respectively. 

In considering dilution under the 2011 LTIP the Committee took account of the long term nature of the plan which extends beyond the length of 
normal incentive plans. 

In addition, the Committee took into account the significant priority returns of £1.7 billion (£13 per share), representing 183% of Net Assets at 30 
April 2011, that shareholders will receive from the plan over this 10 year period, with the actual value of the awards to the Executive Directors 
based on the ongoing value of the Group following this significant realisation of current value to the existing shareholders. 

Historically the Company has operated all its share plans within the ABI dilution limits. There has been no dilution other than under these special 
arrangements for the purposes of the ABI dilution limits in the year ended 30 April 2013. 

OTHER REMUNERATION MATTERS 

All Employee Share Plans 
The Company has regularly consulted widely with the management and individuals in its operating Divisions on whether it was appropriate to 
introduce all employee share plans. The consensus view remains that employees preferred the opportunity of receiving annual cash bonuses 
based on the performance of their respective Divisions rather than participate in a Group based all employee share plan. The Board, therefore, 
does not believe it is in shareholders’ interests to incur the income statement and dilutive cost of share arrangements which would not have the 
desired effect on employees. Accordingly the Company will continue to operate appropriate annual bonus arrangements in all of its Divisions. 

Non-executive Directors’ Fees 
All Non-executive Directors have specific terms of engagement and their remuneration is determined by the Board within the limits set by the 
Articles of Association. The following table sets out the fee rates for the Non-executive Directors in the year ended 30 April 2013 and those rates 
which will apply in the year ending 30 April 2014: 

Total Fee Rates 2013/14 

Total Fee Rates 2012/13 

% Increase of basic fee 

Breakdown of 2013/14 Fee 

Basic Fee 

Chair of Committee Fee 

Committee Chair 

J Armitt 

D Howell 

A C Coppin 

A Nimmo 

G Barker 

V Wadley 

£103,000 

£100,000 (1) 

3.0% 

£69,000 

£67,500 

2.7% 

£56,500 

£67,500 

2.7% 

£56,500 

£55,000 

2.7% 

£69,000 

£55,000 

2.7% 

£56,500 

£55,000 

2.7% 

£103,000 (2) 

– 

Sustainability and 
Health & Safety 

£56,500 

£12,500 

Audit 

£56,500 

£56,500 

– 

– 

£56,500 

£12,500 

– 

–  Remuneration 

£56,500 

– 

– 

(1) Where Directors assumed additional responsibilities during the year, fees have been annualised to allow a direct comparison 

(2)	 Sir John Armitt’s basic fee reflects his role as Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director and Chair of the Sustainability and Health & Safety Committee. 

The Board reviews the fees of the Non-executive Directors annually taking into account the following factors: 

•	  the workload and level of responsibility of the Non-executive Directors under the changing corporate governance expectations of 

shareholders and their representative bodies; and 

•	  the current market rate for fees for Non-executive Directors. 

Non-executive Directors cannot participate in any of the Company’s share incentive plans or performance based plans and are not eligible to join 
the Company’s pension scheme. 

EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ CONTRACTS 

The policy on termination is that the Company does not make payments beyond its contractual obligations. The only event on the occurrence of 
which the Company is potentially liable to make a payment to any of the Executive Directors is on cessation of employment; with the maximum 
payment being 12 months salary. No payment is due on either a Company takeover or in the event of liquidation. In addition, Executive Directors 
will be expected to mitigate their loss. Further, the Committee ensures that there have been no unjustified payments for failure. None of the 
Executive Directors’ contracts provides for liquidated damages. There are no special provisions contained in any of the Executive Directors’ 
contracts which provide for longer periods of notice on a change of control of the Company. Further, there are no special provisions providing for 
additional compensation on an Executive Director’s cessation of employment with the Company. 

72  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   72

22/07/2013   16:56

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ AGREEMENTS 

All Non-executive appointments are subject to a notice period of one month and are subject to the provisions of the Articles of Association 
dealing with appointment and rotation every three years, however in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code are subject to annual 
re-election. All letters of appointment for Non-executive Directors are renewable annually on 1 May. 

Further details of all Directors’ contracts are summarised below: 

Notice 
period by 
Unexpired  Company or 
Director 

term 

Potential 
termination 
payment 

Date of 
contract 

Potential 
payment 
upon 
Company 
takeover 

Potential 
payment in 
event of 
liquidation 

24 June 1994  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

15 July 2002  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

11 September 2002  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

27 June 1996  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

15 January 1996  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

5 May 2004  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

1 October 2007 

24 February 2004 

1 September 2006 

5 September 2011 

3 January 2012 

3 January 2012 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Directors 

Executive Directors 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

Non-executive Directors 

J Armitt 

D Howell 

A C Coppin 

A Nimmo 

G Barker 

V Wadley 

PERFORMANCE GRAPH 

As required by the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Account and Reports) Regulations 2008, the graph below shows the 
Company’s performance, measured by total shareholder return (“TSR”), compared with the performance of the FTSE250, the FTSE All Share and 
the Company’s remuneration comparator group (as set out on page 64). The Company considers these the most relevant indices for total 
shareholder return disclosure required under these Regulations. 

Total shareholder return from 30 April 2008 (%) 

140 

120 

100 

80 

60 

40 

20 

0 

-20 

-40 

The Berkeley Group 
Holdings plc 
FTSE 250 index 

FTSE all share index 
Comparator group 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

2008 

2009 

2010 

2011 

2012 

2013 

(1)  Total shareholder return (“TSR”) is a measure showing the return on investing in one share of the Company over the measurement period (the return is the value 

of the capital gain and reinvested dividends). This calculation is then carried out for the relevant indices and constituents of the comparator group. 

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   73

22/07/2013   16:56

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

73 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION REPORT
 

The following tables and accompanying notes constitute the auditable part of the Remuneration Report, as defined in Schedule 8 to SI 2008/410. 

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION 

The remuneration of the Directors of the Company for the year is as follows:

Chairman 

A W Pidgley 

Executive Directors 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry (1)

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

Non-executive Directors 

J A Armitt 

D Howell 

A Coppin 

A Nimmo (1)

G Barker (2)

V Wadley (2)

V M Mitchell (3)

Salary/fees 
£ 

 Earned bonus (4)
£ 

 Payment in lieu 
 of pension (5)
£ 

Benefits 
 in kind (6) 
£ 

2013
Total
£

 2012 
 Total 
 £ 

780,000 

2,340,000 

132,600 

38,654 

3,291,254 

3,289,728 

470,000 

312,000 

 325,000 

305,000 

305,000 

93,180 

67,500 

67,500 

 55,000 

 55,000 

 55,000 

 34,487 

1,410,000 

79,900 

686,400 

568,750 

400,313 

533,750 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

45,750 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

31,295 

21,527 

31,367 

20,926 

26,416 

1,991,195

1,019,927

925,117

771,989

865,166

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

93,180

67,500

67,500

55,000 

55,000 

55,000 

34,487

 1,989,060 

 884,519 

 558,409 

 805,103 

 767,655 

 72,708 

 67,500 

 67,500 

33,013 

16,667 

16,667 

 100,000 

2,924,667 

5,939,213 

258,250 

170,185 

9,292,315 

8,668,529 

(1) Appointed to the Board on 5 September 2011. 

(2) Appointed to the Board on 3 January 2012. 

(3) Resigned from the Board on 5 September 2012. 

(4)  The earned bonus for the year is added to each individual Director’s plan account. 50% of the balance on the plan account at the end of the financial year is 

released and 50% deferred. The plan is set out in the table below. Before its award Rob Perrins, Nick Simpkin and Sean Ellis each sacrificed part of the released 
element of their bonus entitlement. Pension contributions equal to the amounts given up were made into pension plans for the benefit of their dependants. 
The amount shown in the bonus column reflects the full 2012/13 award. 

(5) Having regard to the Lifetime Allowance introduced under the pension simplification legislation which came into force from 6 April 2006, Executive Directors 
may, as an alternative to receiving a company contribution into a pension arrangement, receive a cash payment in lieu of such pension contributions. Tony 
Pidgley, Rob Perrins and Karl Whiteman have chosen this alternative in respect of their total pension entitlement from the Company. During the year Tony 
Pidgley and Rob Perrins received payments in lieu of pension at 17% of base salary and Karl Whiteman at 15% of base salary. 

(6) Benefits in kind for the current Chairman and Executive Directors relate principally to the provision of a fully expensed motor vehicle or cash allowance 

alternative and private healthcare. 

Where Directors were appointed, or resigned, during the year, the figures in the table relate only to the time when the relevant Director was a 
Main Board Director. 

74  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   74

22/07/2013   16:56

 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

Bonus earned but deferred under the Bonus Banking Plan 
Under the Bonus Plan, the earned bonus for the year is added to each individual Director’s plan account. 50% of the balance on the plan account 
at the end of the financial year is released and 50% deferred. 

The deferred balances on each Director’s plan account are set out below: 

Plan account 
brought forward 
Shares 

Plan account 
brought forward (1) 
£ 

Contribution into 
plan account for 
the financial year 
2012/13 
£ 

Plan account 
balance at 
30 April 2013 
£ 

Amount 
released as of  
30 April 2013 
£ 

Plan account 

Plan account 
carried forward  carried forward (2) 
Shares 

£ 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

144,401 

86,875 

36,157 

31,309 

28,761 

28,761 

3,032,421 

1,824,375 

759,297 

657,489 

603,981 

603,981 

2,340,000 

5,372,421 

(2,686,211) 

2,686,211 

128,835 

1,410,000 

3,234,375 

(1,617,188) 

1,617,188 

686,400 

568,750 

400,313 

533,750 

1,445,697 

1,226,239 

1,004,294 

1,137,731 

(722,849) 

(613,120) 

(502,147) 

(568,866) 

722,849 

613,120 

502,147 

568,866 

77,563 

34,669 

29,406 

24,084 

27,284 

356,264 

7,481,544 

5,939,213 

13,420,757 

(6,710,378) 

6,710,378 

321,841 

(1) Converted at share price of £20.85 at 30 April 2013 plus £0.15 dividend paid 19 April 2013. 

(2) Converted at share price of £20.85 at 30 April 2013. 

PENSIONS 

Payments in Lieu of Pension 
Tony Pidgley, Rob Perrins and Karl Whiteman received payments in lieu of a pension contribution from the Company during the year and this is 
set out in the Directors’ remuneration table above (2012: £132,600, £79,900 and £40,500 respectively). 

No amounts were paid into pension arrangements in respect of Tony Pidgley, Rob Perrins and Karl Whiteman during the year ended 30 April 
2013. 

Defined Contribution Plan 
In respect of Nick Simpkin, Sean Ellis and Greg Fry the following contributions were made to defined contribution plans: 

Executive Directors 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry (1)

S Ellis 

Company 
contributions
2013
£

Company 
 contributions 
 2012 
 £ 

46,800

48,750 

45,750

 40,500 

31,834 

 40,500 

141,300

 112,834 

Age 

43 

 56 

44 

(1) Appointed to the Board on 5 September 2011. 

Where Directors were appointed, or resigned, during the year, the figures in the table relate only to the time when the relevant Director was a 
Main Board Director. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   75

22/07/2013   16:56

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

75 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

REMUNERATION REPORT
 

SHARE INCENTIVE PLANS 

The entitlements under share incentive plans for Directors serving on the Main Board at 30 April 2013 are set out below:

  At 1 May 2012 
Options 

Options vested 
in year 

Options granted 
in year 

At 30 April 2013 
Options 

Value released 
£ 

A W Pidgley 

2009 LTIP Part A (1)

2009 LTIP Part B (2)

2011 LTIP (3)
R C Perrins 

2009 LTIP Part A (1)

2009 LTIP Part B (2)

2011 LTIP (3)
N G Simpkin 

2009 LTIP Part B (2)

2011 LTIP (3)
G J Fry 

2009 LTIP Part A (1)

2009 LTIP Part B (2)

2011 LTIP (3)
K Whiteman 

2009 LTIP Part B (2)

2011 LTIP (3)
S Ellis 

2009 LTIP Part B (2)

2011 LTIP (3)

Total 

2009 LTIP Part A (1)

2009 LTIP Part B (2)

2011 LTIP (3)

 2,842,848 

 1,500,000 

 5,000,000 

 1,066,068 

 750,000 

 5,000,000 

 250,000 

 3,250,000 

 533,034 

 500,000 

 1,866,503 

 250,000 

 2,250,000 

 175,000 

 2,250,000 

 4,441,950 

 3,425,000 

 19,616,503 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

2,842,848 

1,500,000 

5,000,000 

1,066,068 

750,000 

5,000,000 

250,000 

3,250,000 

533,034 

500,000 

1,866,503 

250,000 

2,250,000 

175,000 

2,250,000 

4,441,950 

3,425,000 

19,616,503 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–-

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(1) Exercise price of £2.85 per share * 

(2) Exercise price of £8.25 per share * 

(3) Exercise price of £12.85 per share *
 

*Original exercise price reduced by dividend of £0.15 per share paid April 2013.
 

Further details are set out on pages 69 to 71 of this report.
 

The mid-market share price of the Company was £12.95 as at 1 May 2012 and was £20.85 at 30 April 2013. The mid-market high and low share 
prices of the Company were £21.40 and £11.77 respectively in the year. 

76  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   76

22/07/2013   16:56

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS IN SHARES 

The beneficial interests (unless indicated otherwise) of the Directors in office at the end of the year in the ordinary share capital of the Company 
were as shown below. 

Name 

A W Pidgley 

A W Pidgley Non-beneficial 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

J Armitt 

D Howell 

A C Coppin 

A Nimmo 

G Barker 

V Wadley 

A C Coppin 
Chairman, Remuneration Committee 

16 July 2013 

30 April 
2013 

5,602,350 

19,183 

1,201,596 

27,000 

989,454 

35,815 

10,000 

9,112 

7,431 

4,000 

2,000 

7,800 

2,200 

1 May 
2012 

6,456,838 

19,183 

1,501,596 

27,000 

989,454 

35,815 

10,000 

9,112 

4,000 

4,000 

2,000 

7,800 

– 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

2_P10_BERK_AR13_RemRep_61_77.indd   77

22/07/2013   16:56

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

77 

 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
 

The Company is committed to maintaining a high standard of corporate governance in respect of leadership, effectiveness, accountability,
 
remuneration and relationships with our shareholders as identified by the UK Corporate Governance Code 2010 (the Code).
 

This section and the Remuneration Report detail how the Company has applied the principles and provisions of the Code. The Company’s
 
business model is explained on pages 24 to 51 of the Annual Report.
 

It is the Board’s view that it has been fully compliant with the Code throughout the 2012/13 financial year.
 

A copy of the Code is available on the Financial Reporting Council’s website www.frc.org.uk
 

THE BOARD 

Role 
The Board has a collective responsibility for promoting the long term success of the Company in a safe and sustainable manner in order to create 
shareholder value. The Board provides leadership and sets the Company’s strategic long-term objectives. 

Its duties are set out in a formal schedule of matters specifically reserved for decision by the Board, which include: 

–  Overall management of the Group, its strategy and long-term objectives; 

–  Approval of corporate plans; 

–  Approval of all corporate transactions; 

–  Changes to the Group’s capital structure; 

–  Approval of the Group’s treasury policy; 

–  Approval of the Group’s interim and annual results, dividend policy and shareholder distributions; 

–  Reviewing the Group’s risks and system of internal control; 

–  Changes to the Board and other senior executive roles; 

–  Corporate Governance arrangements and the Board evaluation; and 

–  Approval of policies in key areas including Sustainability, Health & Safety and Business Ethics. 

Composition and Independence 
At the date of this report the Board comprises twelve Directors; the Chairman, five Executive Directors and six independent Non-executive 
Directors. Their biographies are set out on pages 56 and 57. 

During the year, Victoria Mitchell stepped down from the Board at the Annual General Meeting on 5 September 2012 and Sir John Armitt 
succeeded Victoria Mitchell as Deputy Chairman from that date. 

The Board has evolved over recent years to put in place the succession planning that all successful organisations require and the composition of 
the Board continues to be reviewed on a regular basis to ensure that an appropriate balance of skills is maintained. 

The Board considers that all of the current Non-executive Directors were independent throughout the year. David Howell joined the Board in 
February 2004 and has now served more than nine years on the Board. The Board considers David Howell to be independent in both character 
and judgement, notwithstanding his long service on the Board. 

The Non-executive Directors, led by the Senior Independent Director Sir John Armitt have the skills, experience, independence and knowledge 
of the Company to enable them to discharge their respective duties and responsibilities effectively. 

The Group Executive Directors do not hold any Non-executive Director appointments or commitments required to be disclosed under the Code. 

Chairman and Managing Director 
The roles of Group Chairman and Group Managing Director are separately held and there are clear written guidelines to support the division of 
responsibility between them. The Group Chairman is responsible for the effective conduct of the Board and shareholder meetings and for 
ensuring that each Director contributes to effective decision-making. The Group Managing Director has day-to-day executive responsibility for 
the running of the Group’s businesses. His role is to develop and deliver the strategy to enable the Group to meet its objectives. 

Meetings 
The Board met six times during 2012/13 and there were no absences, other than Sean Ellis was unable to attend the meeting on 13 June 2012 
and Alan Coppin was unable to attend the meetings on 13 June 2012 and 10 October 2012. 

In addition to the above formal meetings of the whole Board, the Non-executive Directors meet with the Group Chairman. The Group Managing 
Director and Group Finance Director are invited to attend these meetings in part, to provide an update on the business activities of the Group. 
The Non-executive Directors meet at least annually without the Group Chairman present, chaired by the Senior Independent Director. 

Board papers and agendas are sent out in the week prior to each meeting, thus allowing sufficient time for detailed review and consideration of 
the documents beforehand. In addition, the Board is supplied with comprehensive management information on a regular basis. 

Election and re-election of Directors 
The Articles of Association of the Company include the requirement for Directors to submit themselves to shareholders for re-election every three 
years. In addition, all Directors are subject to re-election by shareholders at the first opportunity after their appointment and thereafter at intervals 
of no more than three years. 

However, in accordance with the requirements of the Code, all Directors offered themselves for re-election at the Annual General Meeting on 
2 September 2013, other than Alan Coppin, who is standing down from the Board. 

78  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

3_P10_BERK_AR13_CorpGov_78_83.indd   78

22/07/2013   17:00

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
GOVERNANCE 

Induction and Development 
On appointment, Non-executive Directors are provided with a detailed induction programme. This covers an overview of the Group’s operations 
and its policies, corporate responsibility and corporate affairs issues, legal matters, and the opportunity to meet with Directors and key staff and to 
visit the Group’s sites. 

No training needs were identified this year, although ongoing training is available to all Directors to meet their individual needs. Board members 
also receive guidance on regulatory matters and the corporate governance framework that the Group operates under. 

Members of the Audit and Remuneration Committees received briefings from our auditors and remuneration advisers respectively to ensure they 
remain up to date with current regulations and developments. 

All Directors have access to advice from the Company Secretary and independent professional advisers, at the Company’s expense, where 
specific expertise is required in the course of their duties. 

Board evaluation 
The Board undertakes an annual formal evaluation of its own performance and that of its Committees. This year, in accordance with Code 
provision B.6.2., the Board undertook an externally facilitated board evaluation conducted by Clare Howard Consultants, who have no other 
connection with the Company. 

The unanimous view of the review was that the Board works very well and that all the Directors are passionate about the business, and that they 
enjoy their role on the Board. 

The Board has a pivotal role in preserving the organisation’s culture and ultimately its success. In line with all successful organisations, succession 
planning is seen as a key focus for the Company and the Board continues to evolve to address this issue. The autonomous structure of the Group 
also provides strength in depth which further mitigates this risk. 

An action plan has been agreed by the Board to address the recommendations made from the review. 

Conflicts of Interest 
In accordance with the Companies Act 2006, the Company’s Articles of Association allow the Board to authorise potential conflicts of interest that 
may arise and to impose such limits or conditions as it thinks fit. The decision to authorise a conflict of interest can only be made by 
non-conflicted Directors (those who have no interest in the matter being considered) and in making such a decision the Directors must act in a 
way they consider in good faith will be most likely to promote the Company’s success. 

The Company has established a procedure whereby actual and potential conflicts of interest of current and proposed roles to be undertaken by 
the Board with other organisations are regularly reviewed in respect of both the nature of those roles, and their time commitment, and for proper 
authorisation to be sought prior to the appointment of any new Director. The Board consider these procedures to be working effectively. 

Insurance 
The Company has in place an appropriate policy which insures Directors against certain liabilities, including legal costs, which they may incur in 
carrying out their duties. 

BOARD COMMITTEES 

The Board has delegated certain matters to individual Executives and to specific committees of the Board. The responsibilities of the key Board 
committees are described below. 

Executive Committee 
The Executive Committee meets monthly and reviews the financial and operating performance of all Group divisions and companies. The Group 
Managing Director, Rob Perrins, chairs this Committee and other members comprise, Tony Pidgley, Nick Simpkin, Karl Whiteman, Sean Ellis and 
Greg Fry. 

The following three Board committees operate within clearly defined Terms of Reference pursuant to the provisions of the Code. The Terms of 
Reference can be downloaded from the section dealing with Investor Relations on the Berkeley website (www.berkeleygroup.co.uk). Copies are 
also available to shareholders on application to the Company Secretary. 

Audit Committee 
The Audit Committee comprises four independent Non-executive Directors. The Committee is chaired by David Howell and the other members 
at 30 April 2013 were Alison Nimmo, Glyn Barker and Veronica Wadley. 

During the year Glyn Barker and Veronica Wadley were appointed to the Committee on 5 September 2012 and Alan Coppin retired from the 
Committee on the same date. 

David Howell, who qualified as a chartered accountant in 1971 and was the Chief Financial Officer and a Main Board Director of lastminute.com 
plc until March 2005, is considered by the Board to have recent and relevant financial experience. David Howell was also Chairman of the Audit 
Committee of Nestor Healthcare Group plc from 2000 to 2003. 

The Committee met formally on three occasions during the year to 30 April 2013 with no absences. 

The Group Finance Director and representatives of the external and internal auditors also attend the Committee’s meetings by invitation. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

3_P10_BERK_AR13_CorpGov_78_83.indd   79

22/07/2013   17:00

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

79 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
 

The Committee has formal Terms of Reference which set out its role and the authority delegated to it by the Board. The key responsibilities of the 
Committee are set out below: 

•	  monitoring the integrity of the financial reporting of the Company and reviewing significant financial reporting issues and accounting policies; 

•	  reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s internal control and risk management systems and monitoring the effectiveness of 

the Group’s internal audit function; and 

•	  overseeing the relationship with the external auditor, including appointment, removal and fees, and ensuring the auditor’s independence and 

the effectiveness of the audit process. 

The Committee met its responsibilities in the year by: 

•	  reviewing the financial disclosures in the Group’s Annual Report and Accounts and half-year financial report prior to their publication. This 
included reviewing the accounting policies and financial reporting judgements. It also reviewed the contents of interim management 
statements issued by the Company during the year; 

•	  undertaking an annual assessment of the Group’s system of risk management and internal control, including: 

–  considering the key risks facing the Group 

–  considering the key elements of the Group’s control processes 

–  receiving reports from both external and internal auditors during the course of the year 

–  reviewing the operations and effectiveness of internal audit 

–  assessing the adequacy of disclosure in the Annual Report 

•	  monitoring ongoing compliance in relation to the Bribery Act; 

•	  reviewing the external auditor’s audit plan, their performance, effectiveness, independence and fees; and 

•	  reviewing the non-audit fees policy. 

The Committee has a policy on the use of the auditors for non-audit services in order to safeguard auditor independence and the ratio of audit
 
fees (including the fees for the Interim Review) to non-audit fees should be no greater than 1:1. The ratio for the year ended 30 April 2013 was
 
within the limits of this ratio. Audit and non-audit fee disclosures are set out in Note 4.
 

Any departure from this ratio will only be as a consequence of transactional work, where the Committee considers it is right for the auditors to
 
undertake such work where the reasons for doing so are compelling, such as where
 

i) 

it is proprietary to them;
 

ii)  they have pre-existing knowledge and experience that precludes the use of alternative firms;
 

iii) the nature of the transaction is that the Group’s auditors are the only practical solution.
 

Non-audit work carried out by all accounting firms, including the auditors, is formally reported to the Audit Committee at each meeting.
 

The external auditors have open recourse to the Non-executive Directors, should they consider it necessary, and there is open dialogue between
 
the auditors and the Chairman of the Audit Committee before each Audit Committee meeting and, after the meeting, the opportunity to meet
 
without the Executive Directors present.
 

Remuneration Committee 
The Remuneration Committee is responsible for determining the Company’s policy for Executive remuneration and the precise terms of 
employment and remuneration of the Executive Directors. The principles and details of Directors’ remuneration are contained in the 
Remuneration Report on pages 61 to 77. 

At 30 April 2013, the Committee was chaired by Alan Coppin and the other members were Sir John Armitt and Glyn Barker, who are all 
independent Non-executive Directors. Glyn Barker was appointed to the Committee on 13 June 2012 and David Howell retired from the 
Committee on the same date. With effect from 14 June 2013, Glyn Barker became Chairman of the Committee. 

The Committee met formally on two occasions during the year to April 2013 with no absences. 

No Director is involved in deciding his or her remuneration. The Executive Directors decide the remuneration of the Non-executive Directors and 
the Committee takes into consideration the recommendations of the Group Managing Director and Group Finance Director regarding the 
remuneration of their Executive colleagues. 

Nomination Committee 
The Nomination Committee ensures that the membership and composition of the Board, including the balance of skills, is appropriate, as well as 
giving full consideration to succession planning on a regular basis. 

The Committee is chaired by the Group Chairman, Tony Pidgley and the Independent Non-executive members at 30 April 2013 were David 
Howell, Sir John Armitt and Veronica Wadley. Veronica Wadley was appointed to the Committee on 13 June 2012. 

The Committee met formally on two occasions during the year to 30 April 2013 with no absences. 

During the year, the activities of the Committee included considering and making recommendations to the Board regarding the membership of 
the Board committees and reviewing succession plans for the Executive team. 

80  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

3_P10_BERK_AR13_CorpGov_78_83.indd   80

22/07/2013   17:00

 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

Appointments to the Board are made based on merit and the specific skills and expertise required for the role. The Committee has chosen not to 
set specific representation targets for women at Board level at this time. However, it recognises that the benefits of diversity, including gender 
diversity, will continue to be an active consideration when further changes to the Board’s composition are considered. 

The process for identifying and recommending new appointments includes a combination of discussions and consultations, in addition to formal 
interviews, utilising the services of independent recruitment specialists, as appropriate. 

KEY RISKS AND INTERNAL CONTROL 

The Board acknowledges that it has overall responsibility for the Group’s system of internal control and for reviewing its effectiveness, at least 
annually. 

Internal control procedures are designed to manage rather than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business objectives, and can only provide 
reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss. 

There are ongoing processes and procedures for identifying, evaluating and managing the significant risks faced by the Group. These processes 
and procedures were in place from the start of the financial year to the date on which the 2013 Annual Report and Accounts were approved and 
accord with the Turnbull guidance issued in 2005. 

The processes are regularly reviewed by the Board and include an annual review by the Directors of the operation and effectiveness of the system 
of internal control as part of its year end procedures. The key features of the system of internal control include: 

Clear organisational structure 
The Group operates through autonomous divisions and operating companies, each with its own board. Operating company boards meet on a 
weekly basis and divisional boards on a monthly basis, and comprehensive information is prepared for such meetings on a standardised basis to 
cover all aspects of the business. Formal reporting lines and delegated levels of authority exist within this structure and the review of risk and 
performance occurs at multiple levels throughout the operating companies, divisions and at Group. 

Risk assessment 
Risk reporting is embedded within ongoing management reporting throughout the Group. At operating company and divisional level, Board 
meeting agendas and packs are structured around the key risks facing the Group. These risks include health and safety, sales, production (build 
cost and programme), land and planning, economic, regulatory and site specific matters. 

In addition, there is a formalised process whereby each division produces quarterly risks and control reports that identify significant risks, the 
potential impact and the actions being taken to mitigate the risks. These risk reports are reviewed and updated regularly. 

A Group Risk Management Report is presented at each Group Main Board Meeting, setting out the current factors affecting the risk profile of the 
Group, the mitigation of these risks and the key changes to this risk profile since the last report. 

Financial reporting 
A comprehensive budgeting and real-time forecasting system, covering both profit and cash, operates within the Group. This enables executive 
management to view key financial and operating data on a daily basis. On a weekly and monthly basis more formal reporting up to the Group 
Executives and the Board is prepared. The results of all operating units are reported monthly and compared to budget and forecast. 

There is a consolidation process in place which ensures that there is an audit trail between the Group’s financial reporting system and the Group’s 
statutory financial statements. 

Investment and contracting controls 
The Group has clearly defined guidelines for the purchase and sale of land within the Group, which include detailed environmental, planning and 
financial appraisal and are subject to executive authorisation. Rigorous procedures are also followed for the selection of consultants and 
contractors. The review and monitoring of all build programmes and budgets are a fundamental element of the Company’s financial reporting 
cycle. 

Policies and procedures 
Policies and procedures, including operating and financial controls, are detailed in policies and procedures manuals that are refreshed and 
improved as appropriate. Training to staff is given where necessary. 

Central functions 
Strong central functions, including Legal, Health & Safety and Company Secretarial, provide support and consistency to the rest of the Group. In 
addition, the principal treasury-related risks, decisions and control processes are managed by the Group Finance function, under the direction of 
the Group Finance Director. 

Internal audit 
Internal auditors are in place in each division and at Group to provide assurance on the operation of the Group’s control framework. 

Whistleblowing 
The Group has a whistleblowing policy which has been communicated to all staff, where Directors, management and staff can report in 
confidence any concerns they may have of malpractice, financial irregularity, breaches of any Group procedures, or other matters. The 
arrangements in place are reviewed by the Audit Committee. 

Bribery Act 
The Group’s Finance Director has the executive responsibility for implementing the Group’s policy and reporting to the Audit Committee, who are 
charged with overseeing the development and implementation of the Group’s policies and procedures and monitoring ongoing compliance. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

3_P10_BERK_AR13_CorpGov_78_83.indd   81

22/07/2013   17:00

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

81 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
 

RELATIONS WITH SHAREHOLDERS 

The Company encourages active dialogue with its current and prospective shareholders through ongoing meetings with institutional investors. 
Major shareholders have the opportunity to meet all Directors after the Annual General Meeting in addition to individual meetings with the 
Company. 

Shareholders are also kept up to date with the Company’s activities through the Annual and Interim Reports. In addition, the corporate website 
gives information on the Group and latest news, including regulatory announcements. The presentations made after the announcement of the 
preliminary and interim results are also available on the website. 

The Board is kept informed of the views of the shareholders through periodic reports from the Company’s broker UBS. Additionally, the 
Non-executive Directors have the opportunity to attend the bi-annual analyst presentations. 

The Senior Independent Director is available to shareholders if they have concerns where contact through the normal channels has failed or when 
such contact is inappropriate. 

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 

All shareholders are invited to participate in the Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) where the Group Chairman, the Group Managing Director and 
the Chairmen of the Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committees will be available to answer questions and will also be available for 
discussions with shareholders both prior to and after the meeting. 

The Company arranges for the Annual Report and Accounts and related papers to be posted to shareholders so as to allow at least 20 working 
days for consideration prior to the AGM. 

The Company complies with the provisions of the Code relating to the disclosure of proxy votes, which, including abstentions, are declared at the 
AGM after each resolution has been dealt with on a show of hands and are announced to the Stock Exchange shortly after the close of the 
meeting. The Company also complies with the requirements of the Code with the separation of resolutions and the attendance of the Chairmen 
of the Board Committees. 

The terms and conditions of appointment for the Non-executive Directors, which set out their expected time commitment, in addition to the 
service contracts for the Executive Directors, are available for inspection at the AGM and during normal business hours at the Company’s 
registered office. 

GOING CONCERN 

The Group’s business activities together with the factors likely to affect its future development performance and position are set out in the 
Business Review. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are all described in the Trading and 
Financial Reviews on pages 41 to 51. 

The Group has significant financial resources and the Directors have assessed the future funding requirements of the Group, including the 
repayment of £1.7 billion to shareholders by 2021, and compared this to the level of committed loan facilities and cash resources over the 
medium term. In making this assessment consideration has been given to the uncertainty inherent in future financial forecasts and where 
applicable reasonable sensitivities have been applied to the key factors affecting the financial performance of the Group. 

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue its operational existence for the foreseeable 
future. For this reason they continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the annual financial statements. 

2013 ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 

Having taken all matters considered by the Board and brought to the attention of the Board during the year into account, the Board is satisfied 
that the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable. The Board believes that the disclosures set out in 
the Annual Report provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s performance, business model and strategy. 

SHARE CAPITAL STRUCTURE 

The Company is compliant with DTR 7.2.6. and the information relating to the Company’s share capital structure is included in the Directors’ 
Report on page 58. 

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES IN RESPECT OF THE ANNUAL REPORT AND THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report, the Remuneration Report and the financial statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year. Under that law the Directors have prepared the Group 
Financial Statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union, and have 
prepared the Parent Company Financial Statements in accordance with United Kingdom Accounting Standards (United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice) and applicable law. 

Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state 
of affairs of the Group and the Company and of the profit or loss of the Group for that period. 

82  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

3_P10_BERK_AR13_CorpGov_78_83.indd   82

22/07/2013   17:00

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE 

In preparing these financial statements, the Directors are required to: 

•	  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently; 

•	  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; 

•	  state whether IFRS as adopted by the European Union and applicable UK accounting standards have been followed, subject to any material 

departures disclosed and explained in the Group and Parent Company Financial Statements respectively; and 

•	  prepare financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group will continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s transactions and 
disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company and the Group and to enable them to ensure that the 
financial statements and the Remuneration Report comply with the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 
of the IAS Regulation. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Company and the Group and hence for taking reasonable 
steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities. 

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the 
preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITY STATEMENT 

Each of the Directors, whose names and functions are listed in the Directors’ Report confirm that, to the best of each person’s knowledge: 

a	  the Group financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with IFRS’s as adopted by the European Union, give a true and fair 

view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of the Group; and 

b	  the management report, which is incorporated into the Directors’ report, includes a fair review of the development and performance of the 

business and the position of the Group, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that it faces. 

By order of the Board 

A M Bradshaw 
Company Secretary 
16 July 2013 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

3_P10_BERK_AR13_CorpGov_78_83.indd   83

22/07/2013   17:00

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

83 

	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Kew Bridge Road 

84  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   84

22/07/2013   15:23

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

FINANCIALS 

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

9597_001_RA_2013_Front_AW.indd   85

22/07/2013   15:23

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

85 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIALS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT TO THE MEMBERS  
OF THE BERKELEY GROUP HOLDINGS PLC 

We have audited the Consolidated Financial Statements of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc for the year ended 30 April 2013 which comprise the 
Consolidated Income Statement, the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position, the 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity, the Consolidated Cash Flow Statement and the related notes. The financial reporting framework 
that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European 
Union. 

RESPECTIVE RESPONSIBILITIES OF DIRECTORS AND AUDITORS 

As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities set out on pages 82 and 83, the directors are responsible for the 
preparation of the Consolidated Financial Statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and 
express an opinion on the Consolidated Financial Statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and 
Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors. 

This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the company’s members as a body in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 
of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for any other purpose 
or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing. 

SCOPE OF THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance that 
the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: whether the 
accounting policies are appropriate to the group’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and adequately disclosed; the 
reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the directors; and the overall presentation of the financial statements. In addition, we 
read all the financial and non-financial information in the Annual Report to identify material inconsistencies with the audited financial statements. 
If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report. 

OPINION ON FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

In our opinion the Consolidated Financial Statements: 

•	 give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s affairs as at 30 April 2013 and of its profit and cash flows for the year then ended; 

•	 have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union; and 

•	 have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and Article 4 of the lAS Regulation. 

OPINION ON OTHER MATTERS PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES ACT 2006 

In our opinion: 

•	 the information given in the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the Consolidated Financial Statements are prepared is consistent 

with the Consolidated Financial Statements; and 

•	 the information given in the Corporate Governance Statement set out on pages 78 to 83 with respect to internal control and risk management 

systems and about share capital structures is consistent with the financial statements. 

MATTERS ON WHICH WE ARE REQUIRED TO REPORT BY EXCEPTION 

We have nothing to report in respect of the following:
 

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
 

•	 certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 

•	 we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or 

•	 a corporate governance statement has not been prepared by the Parent Company. 

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review: 

•	 the Directors’ statement, set out on page 82, in relation to going concern; 

•	 the part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the company’s compliance with the nine provisions of UK Corporate Governance 

Code specified for our review; and 

•	 certain elements of the report to shareholders by the Board on Directors’ remuneration. 

OTHER MATTER 

We have reported separately on the Parent Company financial statements of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc for the year ended 30 April 2013 
and on the information in the Directors’ Remuneration Report that is described as having been audited. 

John Waters (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 
London 
16 July 2013 

86  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

4_P10_BERK_AR13_PrimaryStatementsAuditRep_86_90.indd   86

22/07/2013   17:06

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT
 

For the year ended 30 April 

Revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

Net operating expenses 

Operating profit before exceptional item 

Exceptional profit on disposal of subsidiary 

Operating profit 

Finance income 

Finance costs 

Share of post tax results of joint ventures using the equity method  

Profit before taxation 

Income tax expense 

Profit after taxation 

Profit attributable to: 

Owners of the parent 

Non-controlling interest 

FINANCIALS 

Notes 

2013 
£m 

2012 
£m 

1,372.6 

1,041.1 

8 

3 

3 

11 

2, 4 

6 

(969.2) 

403.4 

(123.3) 

280.1 

– 

280.1 

1.5 

(9.6) 

(1.3) 

270.7 

(61.0) 

209.7 

209.7 

– 

209.7 

(745.8) 

295.3 

(99.6) 

195.7 

30.7 

226.4 

2.4 

(11.8) 

(2.2) 

214.8 

(56.7) 

158.1 

158.5 

(0.4) 

158.1 

Earnings per ordinary share attributable to owners of the parent: 

Basic 

Diluted 

7 

7 

160.0p 

140.3p 

121.0p 

112.8p 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
 

For the year ended 30 April 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Other comprehensive (expense)/income: 

Actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme 

Deferred tax on actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme 

Other comprehensive expense for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Attributable to: 

Owners of the parent 

Non-controlling interest 

Notes 

2013 
£m 

2012 
£m 

5 

6 

209.7 

158.1 

(0.8) 

0.2

(0.6) 

(0.6) 

 0.1 

(0.5) 

209.1 

157.6 

209.1

– 

209.1

 158.0 

(0.4) 

 157.6 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V

I

E
W

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

4_P10_BERK_AR13_PrimaryStatementsAuditRep_86_90.indd   87

22/07/2013   17:06

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

87 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIALS 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
 

As at 30 April 

Assets 

Non-current assets 

Intangible assets 

Property, plant and equipment 

Investment properties 

Investments accounted for using the equity method 

Deferred tax assets 

Current assets 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Non-current assets classified as held for sale 

Total assets 

Liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Borrowings 

Trade and other payables 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges 

Current liabilities 

Borrowings 

Trade and other payables 

Current tax liabilities 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges 

Total liabilities 

Total net assets 

Equity attributable to owners of the parent 

Share capital 

Share premium 

Capital redemption reserve 

Other reserve 

Revaluation reserve 

Retained earnings 

Total equity 

Notes 

2013 
£m 

2012 
£m 

9 

10 

10 

11 

19 

12 

13 

14, 25 

15 

16 

17 

18 

16 

17 

18 

20 

20 

21 

21 

21 

21 

17.2

16.3

26.5

44.1

56.7 

160.8

 17.2 

 11.6 

 83.5 

 46.5 

25.0 

 183.8 

2,066.7

 1,851.7 

126.8

66.8

2,260.3

75.8 

2,336.1 

2,496.9

– 

(115.5) 

(27.9) 

(143.4) 

(22.1) 

(905.9) 

(102.0) 

(1.1) 

(1,031.1) 

(1,174.5) 

1,322.4

6.7

49.3

24.5

(961.3) 

4.0

2,199.2 

1,322.4

 115.2 

 2.7 

 1,969.6 

– 

1,969.6 

 2,153.4 

(12.5) 

(30.4) 

– 

(42.9) 

(48.1) 

(862.7) 

(99.9) 

– 

(1,010.7) 

(1,053.6) 

 1,099.8 

 6.7 

 49.3 

 24.5 

(961.3) 

 3.4 

1,977.2 

 1,099.8 

The financial statements on pages 87 to 109 were approved by the board of directors on 16 July 2013 and were signed on its behalf by: 

N G Simpkin 
Finance Director 

88  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

4_P10_BERK_AR13_PrimaryStatementsAuditRep_86_90.indd   88

22/07/2013   17:06

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
 

Attributable to owners of the parent

 Share  
capital 
£m 

Capital 
 Share   redemption  
 reserve  
£m 

 premium  
£m 

Other  Revaluation 
 reserve  
£m 

 reserve  
£m 

Retained 
 earnings  
£m 

 controlling  
 interest  
£m 

 Total  
£m 

Non-

At 1 May 2012 

Profit after taxation 
for the year 

Other comprehensive 
expense for the year 

Total comprehensive 
income for the year 

Reserves transfer from  
revaluation reserve (note 21) 

Transactions with shareholders: 

Credit in respect of employee  
share schemes (note 5) 

Deferred tax in respect of  
employee share schemes  
(note 6) 

Dividends to equity holders of 
the Company (note 22) 

6.7 

49.3 

24.5 

(961.3) 

3.4 

1,977.2 

1,099.8 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

209.7 

209.7 

(0.6) 

(0.6) 

209.1 

209.1 

0.6 

(0.6) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

11.8 

11.8 

21.4 

21.4 

(19.7) 

(19.7) 

At 30 April 2013 

6.7 

49.3 

24.5 

(961.3) 

4.0 

2,199.2 

1,322.4 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

FINANCIALS 

 Total 
equity
 £m 

1,099.8 

209.7 

(0.6) 

209.1 

– 

11.8 

21.4 

(19.7) 

1,322.4 

Attributable to owners of the parent

 Share  
capital 
£m 

Capital 
 Share   redemption  
 reserve  
£m 

 premium  
£m 

Other  Revaluation 
 reserve  
£m 

 reserve  
£m 

Retained 
 earnings  
£m 

 controlling  
 interest  
£m 

 Total  
£m 

 Total 
equity
 £m 

Non-

At 1 May 2011 

6.7 

49.3 

24.5 

(961.3) 

3.4 

1,806.8 

929.4 

4.4 

933.8 

Profit/(loss) after taxation  
for the year 

Other comprehensive  
expense for the year 

Total comprehensive 
income/(expense) for the year 

Funding from non-controlling  
interest in subsidiary  
undertaking 

Disposal of investment 
in subsidiary 

Transactions with shareholders: 

Credit in respect of employee  
share schemes (note 5) 

Deferred tax in respect of  
employee share schemes  
(note 6) 

At 30 April 2012 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

6.7 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

49.3 

24.5 

(961.3) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

158.5 

158.5 

(0.4) 

158.1 

(0.5) 

(0.5) 

– 

(0.5) 

158.0 

158.0 

(0.4) 

157.6 

– 

– 

– 

– 

0.1 

0.1 

(4.1) 

(4.1) 

8.2 

8.2 

– 

3.4 

4.2 

4.2 

1,977.2  1,099.8 

– 

– 

– 

8.2 

4.2 

1,099.8 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V

I

E
W

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

4_P10_BERK_AR13_PrimaryStatementsAuditRep_86_90.indd   89

22/07/2013   17:06

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

89 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIALS 

CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT
 

For the year ended 30 April 

Cash flows from operating activities 

Cash generated from/(used in) operations 

Interest received 

Interest paid 

Income tax paid 

Net cash flow from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 

Proceeds from sale of investment properties 

Funding from non-controlling Interest in subsidiary undertaking 

Disposal of subsidiary undertaking 

Cash balance in subsidiary undertaking disposed 

Movements in loans with joint ventures 

Net cash flow from investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 

Expenses related to the disposal of the subsidiary undertaking 

Repayment of borrowings 

Dividends paid to Company’s shareholders 

Net cash flow from financing activities 

Notes 

25 

10 

8 

11 

8 

22 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents, including bank overdraft, at the start of the financial year 

Cash and cash equivalents, including bank overdraft, at the end of the financial year 

14, 25 

2013 
£m 

2012 
£m 

189.0 

1.2 

(5.9) 

(69.2) 

115.1 

(6.6) 

0.1 

12.6 

– 

– 

– 

1.1 

7.2 

– 

(38.5) 

(19.7) 

(58.2) 

64.1 

2.7 

66.8 

(108.9) 

5.5 

(5.4) 

(53.7) 

(162.5) 

(2.3) 

0.2 

– 

0.1 

75.7 

(0.2) 

(10.0) 

63.5 

(0.9) 

(163.7) 

– 

(164.6) 

(263.6) 

266.3 

2.7 

90  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

4_P10_BERK_AR13_PrimaryStatementsAuditRep_86_90.indd   90

22/07/2013   17:06

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES 

General Information 
The Berkeley Group Holdings plc (the “Company”) is a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in the United Kingdom. The address of its registered 
office is Berkeley House, 19 Portsmouth Road, Cobham, Surrey, KT11 1JG. The Company and its subsidiaries (together the “Group”) are engaged in 
residential-led, mixed-use property development. Further information about the nature of the Group’s operations and its principal activities are set out in the 
Directors’ Report on page 58. 

Basis of preparation 
These Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with European Union endorsed International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”), 
IFRS-IC interpretations and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to companies reporting under IFRS. The Consolidated Financial Statements 
have been prepared under the historical cost convention and on the going concern basis. Historical cost is generally based on the fair value of the consideration 
given in exchange for the assets. 

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires management to exercise its 
judgement in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where 
assumptions and estimates are significant to the Consolidated Financial Statements, are disclosed on page 93. 

There were no new standards, amendments or interpretations that were adopted by the Group and effective for the first time for the financial year beginning 
1 May 2012 that were material to the Group. Furthermore, there are no standards, amendments or interpretations that are not yet effective that would be expected 
to have a material impact on the Group. 

Basis of consolidation 
(a) Subsidiaries 
The Consolidated Financial Statements comprise the financial statements of the Parent Company and all its subsidiary undertakings. The accounting date for 
subsidiary undertakings is 30 April. 

Subsidiary undertakings are entities that are directly or indirectly controlled by the Group. Control exists where the Group has the power to govern the financial 
and operating policies of the entity so as to obtain the benefits from its activities. 

Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the Group. They are de-consolidated from the date that control ceases. 

The purchase method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiary undertakings by the Group. The cost of an acquisition is measured as the 
fair value of the assets given, equity instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of exchange, plus costs directly attributable to the 
acquisition. Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at their fair values at the 
acquisition date, irrespective of the extent of any non-controlling interest. The excess of cost of acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of identifiable 
net assets acquired is recorded as goodwill. If the cost of the acquisition is less than the fair value of the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, the difference is 
recognised directly in the income statement. 

Where necessary, adjustments are made to the financial statements of subsidiaries to bring the accounting policies used into line with those used by the Group. 
All intra-Group transactions, balances, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation. Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred. 

(b) Non-controlling interests 
Non-controlling interests in the net assets of consolidated subsidiaries are identified separately from the Group’s equity therein. Non-controlling interests consist of 
the amount of those interests at the date of the original business combination and those interests’ share of changes in the equity since the date of the 
combination. 

(c) Joint ventures 
Entities which are jointly controlled with another party or parties (“joint ventures”) are accounted for using the equity method of accounting. The results 
attributable to the Group’s holding in joint ventures are shown separately in the consolidated income statement. The amount included in the consolidated 
statement of financial position is the Group’s share of the net assets of the joint ventures plus net loans receivable. Goodwill arising on the acquisition of joint 
ventures is accounted for in accordance with the policy set out above. The carrying value of goodwill is included in the carrying value of the investment in joint 
ventures. On transfer of land and/or work in progress to joint ventures, the Group recognises only its share of any profits or losses, namely that proportion sold 
outside the Group. 

Segmental reporting 
Operating segments are identified in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision-maker. The Group determines its 
reportable segments having regard to permitted aggregation criteria with the principal condition being that the operating segments should have similar economic 
characteristics. 

The Group is predominantly engaged in residential-led, mixed-use property development, comprising residential revenue, revenue from land sales and 
commercial revenue. 

For the purposes of determining its operating segments, the chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the Executive Committee of the Board. 
This committee approves investment decisions, allocates the Group’s resources and reviews the internal reporting in order to assess performance. 

The Group has determined that its operating segments are the management teams that report into the Executive Committee of the Board. These management 
teams are all engaged in residential-led, mixed-use development in the United Kingdom and, having regard to the aggregation criteria in IFRS 8, the Group has 
one reportable operating segment. 

In addition to its development activities, the Group holds certain residential properties for investment purposes. These investment activities represent a separate 
segment which is included within “Other activities”, as it does not meet the size thresholds to be disclosed as a separate reportable segment. 

Revenue 
Revenue represents the amounts receivable from the sale of properties during the year and other income directly associated with property development. 
Properties are treated as sold and profits are recognised when contracts are exchanged and the building work is physically complete. 

Rental income is recognised in the income statement on a straight line basis over the life of the lease. Any lease incentives are recognised as an integral part of the 
total rental income. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   91

22/07/2013   17:12

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

91 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 

Expenditure 
Expenditure recorded in inventory is expensed through cost of sales at the time of the related property sale. Net operating expenditure is recognised in respect of 
goods and services received when supplied in accordance with contractual terms. Provision is made when an obligation exists for a future liability in respect of a 
past event and where the amount of the obligation can be reliably estimated. 

Taxation 
The taxation expense represents the sum of the current tax payable and deferred tax. Current tax, including UK corporation tax, is provided at the amounts 
expected to be paid (or received) using the tax rules and laws that have been enacted, or substantively enacted, by the reporting date. 

Deferred taxation is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the financial statements 
and corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit, and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax liabilities are 
generally recognised on all taxable temporary differences. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available 
against which deductible temporary differences can be utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from goodwill, or 
from the initial recognition (except in a business combination) of other assets and liabilities in a transaction that affects neither the taxable profit nor the accounting 
profit, or from differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that it is probable that they will not reverse in the foreseeable future. 

Deferred taxation is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised based on tax laws and 
rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. The carrying value of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date 
and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available against which taxable temporary differences can be utilised. 
Deferred taxation is charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited directly to reserves, in which case the 
deferred taxation is also dealt with in reserves. 

Deferred taxation assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets against current tax liabilities and when the 
deferred taxation assets and liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority on either the taxable entity or different taxable entities where 
there is an intention to settle the balances on a net basis. 

Intangible assets 
Where the cost of acquiring new and additional interests in subsidiaries, joint ventures and businesses exceeds the fair value of the net assets acquired, the 
resulting premium on acquisition (goodwill) is capitalised and its subsequent measurement is based on annual impairment reviews and impairment reviews 
performed where an impairment indicator exists, with any impairment losses recognised immediately in the income statement. Goodwill is allocated to 
cash-generating units for the purpose of impairment testing. The allocation is made to those cash-generating units or groups of cash-generating units that are 
expected to benefit from the business combination in which the goodwill arose. 

Property, plant and equipment 
Property, plant and equipment is carried at historic purchase cost less accumulated depreciation. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset and the 
costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use. Depreciation is provided to write off the cost of the assets on a straight line 
basis to their residual value over their estimated useful lives at the following annual rates: 

Freehold buildings 
Motor vehicles 

2% 
25% 

Fixtures and fittings 
Computer equipment 

15% / 20% 
33 1/3 % 

Freehold property disclosed in note 10 to the consolidated financial statements consists of both freehold land and freehold buildings. No depreciation is provided 
on freehold land. Computer equipment is included within fixtures and fittings. The assets’ residual values, carrying values and useful lives are reviewed on an 
annual basis and adjusted if appropriate at each balance sheet date. Where an impairment is identified, the recoverable amount of the asset is identified and an 
impairment loss, where appropriate, is recognised in the income statement. 

Subsequent costs are included in the assets’ carrying amount or recognised as a separate asset, as appropriate, only when it is probable that future economic 
benefits associated with the item will flow to the Group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. The carrying amount of the replaced part is 
derecognised. All other repairs and maintenance are charged to the income statement during the financial period in which they are incurred. 

Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing the proceeds with the carrying amount and are recognised within net operating expenses in the 
income statement. 

Investment properties 
Investment properties, which are properties held to earn rental income, are recognised using the “cost model” and are carried in the statement of financial 
position at historic cost less accumulated depreciation. 

Depreciation is provided to write off the element of the cost of the assets that relates to buildings at 2% per annum on a straight line basis. No depreciation is 
charged on the element of the cost of the assets that relates to land. 

Non-current assets held for sale 
Non-current assets are classified as held for sale when their carrying amount is to be recovered principally through a sale transaction and a sale is considered highly 
probable. They are stated at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell. 

Inventories 
Property in the course of development and completed units are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Direct cost comprises the cost of land, raw 
materials and development costs but excludes indirect overheads. Provision is made, where appropriate, to reduce the value of inventories and work in progress to 
their net realisable value. 

Land purchased for development, including land in the course of development, is initially recorded at fair value. Where such land is purchased on deferred 
settlement terms, and the fair value differs from the amount that will subsequently be paid in settling the liability, this difference is charged as a finance cost in the 
income statement over the period to settlement. 

Trade and other receivables 
Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision for 
impairment. A provision for impairment of trade receivables is established when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts 
due according to the original terms of the receivables. The amount of the provision is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value 
of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use of an allowance 
account, and the amount of the loss is recognised in the income statement within net operating expenses. When a trade receivable is uncollectible, it is written off 
against the allowance account for trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited against net operating expense in the 
income statement. 

92  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   92

22/07/2013   17:12

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents comprises cash balances in hand and at the bank, including bank overdrafts repayable on demand which form part of the Group’s cash 
management, for which offset arrangements across Group businesses have been applied where appropriate. 

Share capital 
Ordinary shares and redeemable preference shares are classified as equity. 

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds. 

Where any Group company purchases the Company’s equity share capital (treasury shares), the consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental 
costs (net of income taxes) is deducted from equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are cancelled, sold or reissued. Where such shares 
are subsequently sold or reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly attributable incremental transaction costs and the related income tax effects, is 
included in equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders. 

Borrowings 
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the 
redemption value is recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method. 

Trade and other payables 
Trade and other payables on normal terms are not interest bearing and are stated at their nominal value which is considered to be their fair value. Trade payables 
on extended terms are recorded at their fair value at the date of acquisition of the asset to which they relate. The discount to nominal value is amortised over the 
period of the credit term and charged to finance costs. 

Provisions 
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events, and it is probable that an outflow of resources 
will be required to settle that obligation, and the amount has been reliably estimated. 

Deposits 
New property deposits and on account contract receipts are held within current trade and other payables. 

Employee benefits 
(a) Pensions 
The Group accounts for pensions under IAS 19 “Employee benefits”. The Group has both defined benefit and defined contribution plans. The defined benefit 
plan was closed to future accrual with effect from 1 April 2007. 

For the defined benefit scheme, the obligations are measured using the projected unit method. The calculation of the net obligation is performed by a qualified 
actuary. The operating and financing costs of these plans are recognised separately in the income statement; service costs are set annually on the basis of actuarial 
valuations of the scheme and financing costs are recognised in the period in which they arise. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised immediately in the 
statement of comprehensive income. In accordance with IAS 19 the Group does not recognise on the statement of financial position any surplus in the scheme. 

Pension contributions under defined contribution schemes are charged to the income statement as they fall due. 

(b) Share-based payments 
Where the Company operates equity-settled, share-based compensation plans, the fair value of the employee services received in exchange for the grant of the 
options is recognised as an expense. The total amount to be expensed over the vesting period is determined by reference to the fair value of the options granted. 
At each balance sheet date, the Group revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest. It recognises the impact of the revision to original 
estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity. 

The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium when the options are 
exercised. 

Leasing agreements 
Payments and receipts under operating lease agreements are charged or credited against profit on a straight line basis over the life of the lease. 

Accounting estimates and judgements 
Management applies the Group’s accounting policies as described above when making critical accounting judgements, of which no individual judgement is 
deemed to have a significant impact upon the financial statements, apart from those involving estimations, which are detailed below. 

(a) Carrying value of land and work in progress and estimation of costs to complete 
The Group holds inventories stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Such inventories include land, work in progress and completed units. As 
residential development is largely speculative by nature, not all inventories are covered by forward sales contracts. Furthermore due to the nature of the Group’s 
activity and, in particular the scale of its developments and the length of the development cycle, the Group has to allocate site-wide development costs between 
units being built and/or completed in the current year and those for future years. It also has to forecast the costs to complete on such developments. 

In making such assessments and allocations, there is a degree of inherent estimation uncertainty. The Group has established internal controls designed to 
effectively assess and centrally review inventory carrying values and ensure the appropriateness of the estimates made. 

(b) Deferred tax 
Assumptions are made as to the recoverability of deferred tax assets, especially as to whether there will be sufficient future profits to fully utilise these in future 
years. 

(c) Share-based payments 
Assumptions are made in determining the fair value of employee services received in exchange for the grant of options under share-based payment awards at the 
date of grant. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   93

22/07/2013   17:12

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

93 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

2 SEGMENTAL DISCLOSURE 

For the purposes of determining its operating segments, the chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the Executive Committee of the Board. 
This committee approves investment decisions, allocates the Group’s resources and reviews the internal reporting in order to assess performance. 

The Group has determined that its operating segments are the management teams that report into the Executive Committee of the Board. These management 
teams are all engaged in residential-led, mixed-use development in the United Kingdom and, having regard to the aggregation criteria in IFRS 8, the Group has 
one reportable operating segment. 

Segment results 

Profit before tax 

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Other activities 

2013 
£m 

269.7 

1.0 

270.7 

2012 
£m 

215.1 

(0.3) 

214.8 

Segment profit before tax represents the profit before tax allocated to each segment. This is the measure reported to the Executive Committee of the Board for 
the purpose of resource allocation and assessment of segment performance. 

Segment assets 

Assets 

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Other activities 

2013 
£m 

2,394.6 

102.3 

2,496.9 

2012 
£m 

2,069.9 

83.5 

2,153.4 

For the purpose of monitoring segment performance and allocating resources between segments all assets are considered to be attributable to residential-led 
mixed-use development with the exception of investment properties which are held for the Group’s investing activities and have therefore been allocated to other 
activities. 

3 NET FINANCE COSTS 

Finance income 

Finance costs: 

Interest payable on bank loans and non-utilisation fees 

Amortisation of facility fees 

Other finance costs 

Net finance costs 

Finance income predominantly represents interest earned on cash deposits.
 

Other finance costs represent imputed interest on taxation and on land purchased on deferred settlement terms.
 

2013 
£m 

1.5 

(4.8) 

(0.9) 

(3.9) 

(9.6) 

(8.1) 

2012 
£m 

2.4 

(4.7) 

(2.5) 

(4.6) 

(11.8) 

(9.4) 

94  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   94

22/07/2013   17:12

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

4 PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION 

Profit before taxation is stated after charging/(crediting) the following amounts: 

Staff costs (note 5) 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 10) 

Profit on sale of investment properties 

Rental income from investment properties 

Direct operating expense in relation to investment properties including depreciation 

Operating lease costs 

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s auditor for the audit of the Parent Company  

and consolidated financial statements 

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s auditors for other services: 

– Audit of the Company’s subsidiaries 

– Audit related assurance services 

– Taxation compliance services 

– Taxation advisory services 

– All other non-audit services 

2013 
£m

138.2 

1.8 

(3.6) 

(8.1) 

4.8 

1.9 

0.2 

0.1 

0.1 

0.1 

– 

0.2 

2012 
 £m 

112.8 

1.1 

– 

(4.0) 

2.8 

1.7 

0.1 

0.1 

0.1 

0.2 

0.2 

0.7 

The value of inventories expensed and included in the cost of sales is £895.3m (2012: £687.1m).
 

Remuneration paid to the auditors in respect of audit related assurance services relates to the interim review.
 

Remuneration paid to the auditors in respect of taxation advisory services was incurred primarily in connection with corporate activity in the year.
 

All other non-audit services include remuneration advisory services. In 2011/12 £0.6m of these costs were one-off in nature, comprising taxation and remuneration
 
services towards the implementation of the Group’s strategy to return £13 per share to shareholders over the next 10 years and the associated 2011 LTIP.
 

In addition to the above services, the Group’s auditor acted as auditor to The Berkeley Final Salary Plan. The appointment of auditors to the Group’s pension
 
scheme and the fees paid in respect of the audit are agreed by the trustees of the scheme, who act independently of the management of the Group. The fees paid
 
to the Group’s auditors for audit services to the pension scheme during the year were £7,200 (2012: £7,000).
 

5 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES 

Staff costs 

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Share-based payments 

Pension costs 

2013 
£m 

97.4 

26.0 

11.8 

3.0 

138.2 

2012 
£m 

88.7 

13.2 

8.2 

2.7 

112.8 

The average monthly number of persons employed by the Group during the year was 1,326 (2012: 1,139). 

Key management compensation 
Key management comprises the Main Board, as the Directors are considered to have the authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the 
activities of the Group. Details of Directors’ emoluments are set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 61 to 77. 

Share-based payments 
The Group operates three equity-settled share based payments schemes. The charge to the income statement in respect of share-based payments in the year 
relating to grants of share options awarded under the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan, the 2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan and deferred shares or notional shares 
under the Bonus Plan, was £11.8m (2012: £8.2m). The charge to the income statement attributable to key management is £10.9m (2012: £7.1m). 

2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan 
Part A 
On 29 June 2009 the balance of the shares originally awarded under the 2004(b) Long-Term Incentive Plan, totalling 5,330,340 shares, were replaced by options 
under Part A of the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Scheme, with an exercise price of £2.85 per share, in accordance with the shareholder approval obtained at the 
Extraordinary General Meeting on 15 April 2009. These will become exercisable by the relevant Executive Directors on 31 January 2014, subject to continued 
employment at that date. During the year, no options lapsed (2012: 880,390, on the departure of a Director), leaving 4,441,950 outstanding. 

Part B 
Part B of the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan covers 6,830,000 share options with an exercise price of £8.25. Vesting of the options is in two tranches: 50% on 
15 April 2015 and 50% on 15 April 2016. The options are conditional on continued employment at the relevant vesting date and the satisfaction of the underpin 
condition that Net Assets per Share are at least £5.94 at 15 April 2015. During the year, 180,000 options lapsed on the departure of employees (2012: 530,000) 
leaving 6,120,000 options outstanding. 

Bonus Plan 
Under the terms of the Bonus Plan set out in the Remuneration Report participants to the plan are entitled to 50% of the balance of their plan account at the end 
of each financial year. The remaining balance is deferred in shares or notional shares. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   95

22/07/2013   17:12

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

95 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

5 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES CONTINUED 

2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan 
The Company announced in June 2011 as part of a strategic review of the business a long term plan to return approximately £1.7 billion to shareholders over 
the next 10 years. The rules were subsequently amended and approved at the 2012 Annual General Meeting to allow the returns to be made through a 
combination of dividends (£13 per share) and share buy backs (‘distributions’). The cumulative distributions required by the plan on or before the relative 
milestone dates are set out below:

30 September 2015 

30 September 2018 

30 September 2021 

  Cumulative distributions 

£568.7m 

£1,136.1m 

£1,703.6m 

A new long term remuneration plan was proposed to support this strategy, the 2011 Long Term Incentive Plan (“2011 LTIP”), which was approved by 
shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 5 September 2011 and the amendment at the Annual General Meeting on 5 September 2012. The key 
features of the 2011 LTIP are: 

–	  if the Company returns £1.7 billion to shareholders over a ten year period via a series of dividend payments (£13 per share) and share buy backs by the 

milestone dates referred to above, participants will be entitled to exercise options and receive a number of ordinary shares in the capital of the Company 
at the end of the ten year period. 

–	  the maximum number of shares capable of being earned by all participants are 19,616,503 shares, being 13% of the fully diluted share capital of the Company 

at the date of approval of the plan. 

–	  the exercise price of options granted under the 2011 LTIP will be £13 per share less an amount equal to the value of all dividends paid between the date of 

approval of the 2011 LTIP and 30 September 2021, provided the exercise price cannot be less than zero. 

The fair value of the options granted during that year, determined using the current market pricing model, was £3.17 for options which vest on 30 September 2021. 
The inputs into the current market option pricing model were:

Grant date 

Vesting date 

Share price at grant date (p) 

Exercise price (p) 

Discount rate 

Inputs 

5 September 2011 

30 September 2021 

1,236 

nil 

6.3% 

The discount rate was determined by calculating the Group’s expected cost of capital over the vesting period at the grant date. 

Pensions 
During the year, two principal pension schemes were in place for employees. The Berkeley Group plc Group Personal Pension Plan and the St George PLC Group 
Personal Pension Plan are defined contribution schemes. The assets of these schemes were held in separate trustee administered funds. 

The Berkeley Final Salary Plan is a defined benefit scheme which was closed to future accrual with effect from 1 April 2007. 

Defined contribution plan 
Contributions amounting to £2.7m (2012: £2.4m) were paid into the defined contribution schemes during the year. 

Defined benefit plan 
The Berkeley Final Salary Plan is subject to an independent actuarial valuation at least every three years. The most recently finalised valuation was carried out as at 
30 April 2013. The method adopted in the 2013 valuation was the projected unit method, which assumed a return on investment both prior to and after retirement 
of 5.70% per annum and pension increases of 3.25% per annum. The market value of the Berkeley Final Salary Plan assets at 30 April 2013 was £16.0m and was 
sufficient to cover 100% of the scheme’s liabilities. Following the finalisation of the 2007 valuation, with effect from 1 July 2008, employer’s required regular 
contributions were reduced to zero. Following the finalisation of the 2010 valuation this position remained unchanged. Notwithstanding this the Group made 
additional voluntary contributions of £0.6m during the year (2012: £0.6m). 

The major assumptions used by the actuary for the 30 April 2013 valuation were: 

Valuation at: 

Rate of increase in salaries 

Discount rate 

Inflation assumption (RPI) 

Inflation assumption (CPI) 

Rate of increase in pensions in payment post-97 (Pre-97 receive 3% p.a. increases) 

30 April 
2013 

– 

4.30% 

3.25% 

2.50% 

3.25% 

30 April 
2012 

– 

4.80% 

3.25% 

2.50% 

3.25% 

The mortality assumptions are the standard S1PA CMI_2009_X [1.0%] (2012: S1PA CMI_2009_X [1.0%]) base table for males and females, both adjusted for each 
individual’s year of birth to allow for future improvements in mortality rates. The life expectancy of male and female pensioners (now aged 65) retiring at age 65 on 
the balance sheet date is 22.0 years and 24.0 years respectively (2012: 22.1 and 24.1). The life expectancy of male and female deferred pensioners (now aged 50) 
retiring at age 65 after the balance sheet date is 23.0 years and 25.2 years respectively (2012: 23.1 and 25.3). 

96  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   96

22/07/2013   17:12

  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
  
   
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

The fair value of the assets and the expected rates of return on the assets were as follows: 

30 April 2013 

30 April 2012 

UK Equities 

Global Equities 

Emerging Market Equities 

Emerging Market Debt 

High Yield Bonds 

Diversified Growth Fund 

Property 

Government Bonds (over 15 years) 

Government Bonds (5 to 15 years) 

Corporate Bonds 

Cash 

Fair value of plan assets 

Long-term
rate of 
return 

6.80% 

7.10% 

8.10% 

7.10% 

7.10% 

6.60% 

5.30% 

3.30% 

2.70% 

4.70% 

0.50% 

Value 
£m 

1.2 

2.9 

1.2 

1.6 

0.8 

2.9 

1.3 

0.8 

0.8 

2.4 

0.1 

16.0 

Long-term 
rate of 
return 

6.95% 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

3.30% 

2.70% 

4.70% 

0.50% 

The overall expected rate of return on scheme assets is a weighted average of the individual expected rates of return on each asset class. 

The amounts recognised in the statement of financial position are determined as follows: 

Present value of defined benefit obligations 

Fair value of plan assets 

Net surplus 

Unrecognised asset in accordance with IAS 19 

Net amount recognised on the statement of financial position 

The amounts recognised in the income statement are as follows: 

Current service cost 

Past service cost 

Interest on pension scheme liabilities 

Expected return on plan assets 

Total included within finance income 

Changes in the present value of the defined benefit obligation: 

Present value of defined benefit obligations at 1 May 

Current service cost 

Interest on pension scheme liabilities 

Contributions by plan participants 

Actuarial loss on scheme liabilities recognised in the statement of comprehensive income 

Net benefits paid out 

Present value of defined benefit obligations at 30 April 

Changes in the fair value of plan assets: 

Fair value of plan assets at 1 May 

Expected return on plan assets 

Actuarial gains on plan assets recognised in the statement of comprehensive income 

Contributions by the employer 

Contributions by plan participants 

Net benefits paid out 

Fair value of plan assets at 30 April 

2013 
£m 

(14.6) 

16.0 

1.4 

(1.4) 

– 

2013 
£m 

– 

– 

0.6 

(0.8) 

(0.2) 

2013 
£m 

13.3 

– 

0.6 

– 

1.1 

(0.4) 

14.6 

2013 
£m 

14.0 

0.8 

1.0 

0.6 

– 

(0.4) 

16.0 

Value 
£m 

6.4 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

1.6 

1.6 

4.0 

0.4 

14.0 

2012 
£m 

(13.3) 

14.0 

0.7 

(0.7) 

– 

2012 
£m 

– 

– 

0.7 

(0.7) 

– 

2012 
£m 

12.4 

– 

0.7 

– 

0.5 

(0.3) 

13.3 

2012 
£m 

12.8 

0.7 

0.2 

0.6 

– 

(0.3) 

14.0 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   97

22/07/2013   17:12

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

97 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

5 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES CONTINUED 

Cumulative actuarial gains and losses recognised in equity: 

Cumulative amounts of losses recognised in the statement of comprehensive income at 1 May 

Net actuarial losses recognised in the year 

Change in irrecoverable surplus in accordance with IAS 19 

Cumulative amounts of losses recognised in the statement of comprehensive income at 30 April 

Actual gain on plan assets: 

Expected gain on scheme assets 

Actuarial gain on scheme assets 

Actual gain on scheme assets 

History of asset values, defined benefit obligations, and experience gains and losses: 

30 April 
2012 
£m 

14.0 

(13.3) 

0.7 

30 April 
2012 

0.2 

1.46% 

– 

– 

30 April 
2011 
£m 

12.8 

(12.4) 

0.4 

30 April 
2011 

0.4 

3.06% 

0.1 

(0.50%) 

Fair value of scheme assets 

Present value of scheme liabilities 

Net surplus in the plan 

Experience adjustments arising 
on scheme assets: 

Amount (£m) 

% of scheme assets 

Experience adjustments arising 
on scheme liabilities: 

Amount (£m) 

% of the present value  
of scheme liabilities 

30 April 
2013 
£m 

16.0 

(14.6) 

1.4 

30 April 
2013 

1.0 

6.22% 

– 

– 

6 TAXATION 

The tax charge for the year is as follows: 

Current tax 

UK corporation tax payable 

Adjustments in respect of previous years 

Deferred tax at 24% (note 19) (2012: 26%) 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 24% to 23% (note 19) (2012: 26% to 24%) 

Tax on items recognised directly in other comprehensive income is as follows: 

Deferred tax on actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme (note 19) 

Tax on items recognised directly in equity is as follows: 

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes (note 19) 

98  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

2013 
£m 

(3.6) 

(0.1) 

(0.7) 

(4.4) 

2013 
£m 

0.8 

1.0 

1.8 

30 April 
2010 
£m 

11.5 

(11.4) 

0.1 

30 April 
2010 

1.2 

10.35% 

(0.1) 

0.43% 

2013 
£m 

(77.7) 

7.0 

(70.7) 

10.8 

(1.1) 

(61.0) 

2013 
£m 

0.2 

2013 
£m 

21.4 

2012 
£m 

(3.0) 

(0.3) 

(0.3) 

(3.6) 

2012 
£m 

0.7 

0.2 

0.9 

30 April 
2009 
£m 

9.4 

(8.3) 

1.1 

30 April 
2009 

(1.2) 

(13.62%) 

0.1 

(0.81%) 

2012 
£m 

(65.5) 

6.0 

(59.5) 

4.1 

(1.3) 

(56.7) 

2012 
£m 

0.1 

2012 
£m 

4.2 

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   98

22/07/2013   17:12

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

The tax charge assessed for the year differs from the standard rate of UK corporation tax of 23.92% (2012: 25.83%). The differences are explained below: 

Profit before tax 

Tax on profit at standard UK corporation tax rate 

Effects of: 

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 

Tax effect of share of results of joint ventures 

Adjustments in respect of previous periods – current tax 

Adjustments in respect of deferred tax change of rate from 24% to 23% (2012: 26% to 24%) 

Other 

Tax charge  

2013 
£m 

270.7 

64.7 

0.9 

0.4 

(7.0) 

1.1 

0.9 

61.0 

2012 
£m 

214.8 

55.5 

0.6 

0.6 

(6.0) 

1.3 

4.7 

56.7 

The statutory tax rate in 2013 was at 23.92% (11 months at 24%, 1 month at 23%) 

The adjustments in respect of previous years includes items such as contaminated land relief, research and development relief and other timing differences that 
are not individually significant and have not therefore been separately disclosed. 

The other adjustment predominantly relates to the deferred tax effect of transferring the ownership of certain properties during the year to subsidiaries 
incorporated in overseas tax jurisdictions with different rates to the UK. 

7 EARNINGS PER ORDINARY SHARE 

Basic earnings per ordinary share is calculated as profit for the financial year attributable to shareholders of the Group divided by the weighted average number of 
shares in issue during the year. 

Profit attributable to shareholders (£m) 

Weighted average number of shares (m) 

Basic earnings per ordinary share (p) 

2013 

209.7 

131.0 

160.0 

2012 

158.5 

131.0 

121.0 

For diluted earnings per ordinary share, the weighted average number of shares in issue is adjusted to assume the conversion of all potentially dilutive ordinary 
shares. At 30 April 2013, the Group had four categories of potentially dilutive ordinary shares: 4.4 million £2.85 share options under the 2009 LTIP Part A, 6.1 million 
£8.25 share options under the 2009 LTIP Part B; 19.6 million £nil share options under the 2011 LTIP; and 0.5 million shares under the Bonus Plan. 

A calculation is done to determine the number of shares that could have been acquired at fair value based on the aggregate of the exercise price of each share 
option and the fair value of future services to be supplied to the Group which is the unamortised share-based payments charge. The difference between the 
number of shares that could have been acquired at fair value and the total number of options is used in the diluted earnings per share calculation. 

Profit used to determine diluted EPS (£m) 

Weighted average number of shares (m)  

Adjustments for: 

Share options – 2009 LTIP Part A (m)  

Share options – 2009 LTIP Part B (m)  

Share options – 2011 LTIP (m) 

Bonus plan shares (m)  

Shares used to determine diluted EPS (m)  

Diluted earnings per ordinary share (p)  

2013 

209.7 

131.0 

3.6 

2.6 

11.9 

0.3 

149.4 

140.3 

2012 

158.5 

131.0 

3.3 

1.4 

4.6 

0.3 

140.6 

112.8 

8 PROFIT ON DISPOSAL OF SUBSIDIARY 

In the comparative year, on 30 September 2011, Berkeley disposed of its 51% shareholding in Winstanley 1 Limited, a company which was established in 2009 to 
develop a postgraduate student scheme at Clapham Junction to be let to students from Imperial College London, who owned the remaining 49% of the company. 
Berkeley’s share of the proceeds of the sale of the company was £75.7 million and this resulted in an exceptional profit on disposal of £30.7 million, calculated as 
follows: 

Non current assets 

Current assets 

Non controlling interest 

Net assets disposed 

Expenses related to disposal 

Profit on disposal 

Consideration 

2012 

1.2 

47.0 

(4.1) 

44.1 

0.9 

30.7 

75.7 

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

99 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   99

22/07/2013   17:12

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

9 INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Cost 

At 1 May 2012 and 30 April 2013 

Accumulated impairment 

At 1 May 2012 and at 30 April 2013 

Net book value 

At 1 May 2012 and at 30 April 2013 

Cost 

At 1 May 2011 and 30 April 2012 

Accumulated impairment 

At 1 May 2011 and at 30 April 2012 

Net book value 

At 1 May 2011 and at 30 April 2012 

Goodwill 
£m 

17.2 

– 

17.2 

17.2 

– 

17.2 

The goodwill balance relates solely to the acquisition of the 50% of the ordinary share capital of St James Group Limited, completed on 7 November 2006, that 
was not already owned by the Group. The goodwill balance is tested annually for impairment. The recoverable amount has been determined on the basis of the 
value in use of the business using the current five year pre-tax forecasts. Key assumptions are as follows: 

(i) Cash flows beyond a five year period are not extrapolated; 

(ii) A pre-tax discount rate of 11.62% (2012: 11.19%) based on the Group’s weighted average cost of capital.
 

The Directors have identified no reasonably possible change in a key assumption which would give rise to an impairment charge.
 

10 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT AND INVESTMENT PROPERTY 

Property, plant and equipment 

Freehold 
property 
£m 

Fixtures and 
fittings 
£m 

Motor 
vehicles 
£m 

Cost 

At 1 May 2012 

Additions 

Disposals 

Transfer to held for sale (Note 15) 

At 30 April 2013 

Accumulated Depreciation 

At 1 May 2012 

Charge for the year  

Disposals 

Transfer to held for sale (Note 15) 

At 30 April 2013 

Net book value 

At 1 May 2012 

At 30 April 2013 

Cost 

At 1 May 2011 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 30 April 2012 

Accumulated Depreciation 

At 1 May 2011 

Charge for the year  

Disposals 

At 30 April 2012 

Net book value 

At 1 May 2011 

At 30 April 2012 

8.0 

3.1 

– 

– 

11.1 

0.3 

0.2 

– 

– 

0.5 

7.7 

10.6 

8.0 

– 

– 

8.0 

0.2 

0.1 

– 

0.3 

7.8 

7.7 

6.8 

2.6 

(0.6) 

– 

8.8 

4.8 

1.1 

(0.6) 

– 

5.3 

2.0 

3.5 

6.0 

1.5 

(0.7) 

6.8 

4.9 

0.6 

(0.7) 

4.8 

1.1 

2.0 

2.9 

0.9 

(0.3) 

– 

3.5 

1.0 

0.5 

(0.2) 

– 

1.3 

1.9 

2.2 

2.8 

0.8 

(0.7) 

2.9 

1.1 

0.4 

(0.5) 

1.0 

1.7 

1.9 

Total 
£m 

17.7 

6.6 

(0.9) 

– 

23.4 

6.1 

1.8 

(0.8) 

– 

7.1 

11.6 

16.3 

16.8 

2.3 

(1.4) 

17.7 

6.2 

1.1 

(1.2) 

6.1 

10.6 

11.6 

Investment 
 properties 
£m 

84.6 

29.5 

(9.2) 

(77.5) 

27.4 

1.1 

1.7 

(0.2) 

(1.7) 

0.9 

83.5 

26.5 

28.7 

55.9 

– 

84.6 

0.1 

1.0 

– 

1.1 

28.6 

83.5 

Additions to investment property represent the value at cost of completed properties transferred from the Group’s inventory, which are to be held for rental 
purposes. The market value of the properties held at 30 April 2013 is £43.9m (30 April 2012: £114.5m) as determined by the Directors taking into account all 
relevant factors including their nature and location. No independent valuation was undertaken. 

100  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   100

22/07/2013   17:12

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

2013 
£m 

13.7 

35.1 

(4.2) 

(0.5) 

44.1 

2013 
£m 

46.5 

(1.3) 

(1.1) 

44.1 

2013 
£m 

–

161.9 

(86.4) 

(31.4) 

44.1 

9.4 

(8.7) 

0.7 

(1.9) 

(1.2) 

(0.1) 

(1.3) 

2013 
£m 

310.0 

1,711.7

45.0

2,066.7

2013 
£m 

105.9 

11.8 

9.1 

126.8 

2012 
£m 

15.4 

34.6 

(2.8) 

(0.7) 

46.5 

2012 
£m 

38.7 

(2.2) 

10.0 

46.5 

2012 
£m 

 – 

131.8 

(41.2) 

(44.1) 

46.5 

16.2 

(16.6) 

(0.4) 

(1.7) 

(2.1) 

(0.1) 

(2.2) 

2012 
£m 

360.5 

 1,422.6 

 68.6 

 1,851.7 

2012 
£m 

105.3 

6.4 

3.5 

115.2 

11 INVESTMENTS 

Unlisted shares at cost 

Loans 

Share of post-acquisition reserves 

Elimination of profit on transfer of inventory to joint ventures 

Details of the principal joint ventures are provided in note 28. 

The movement on the investment in joint ventures during the year is as follows: 

At 1 May 

Loss after tax for the year 

Net (decrease)/increase in loans to joint ventures 

At 30 April 

The Group’s share of joint ventures’ net assets, income and expenses is made up as follows: 

Non-current assets 

Current assets 

Current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Revenue 

Costs 

Operating (loss)/profit 

Interest charges 

Loss before taxation 

Tax charge 

Share of post tax loss of joint ventures 

12 INVENTORIES 

Land not under development 

Work in progress 

Completed units 

13 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES 

Trade receivables 

Other receivables 

Prepayments and accrued income 

Further disclosures relating to trade receivables are set out in note 26. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   101

22/07/2013   17:12

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013  101 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

14 CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS 

Cash and cash equivalents 

2013 
£m 

66.8 

2012 
£m 

2.7 

15 NON-CURRENT ASSETS HELD FOR SALE 

During the year, Berkeley reached agreement to sell 534 HCA funded residential properties within its rental fund for £105.4 million. The transaction, which 
completed on 5 June 2013, will be reported in the results for the year ending 30 April 2014 at which time the sale became unconditional. 

16 BORROWINGS 

Current 

Bank loans 

Other loans 

Non-current 

Other loans 

Total borrowings 

2013 
£m 

(4.7) 

(17.4) 

(22.1) 

– 

(22.1) 

2012 
£m 

(48.1) 

– 

(48.1) 

(12.5) 

(60.6) 

Other loans relate to funding provided by the Homes and Communities Agency, subject to an agreement in respect of the Group’s rental properties. Further 
disclosures relating to current and non-current loans are set out in note 26. 

17 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES 

Current 

Trade payables 

Deposits and on account contract receipts 

Loans from joint ventures 

Other taxes and social security 

Accruals and deferred income 

Non-current 

Trade payables 

Total trade and other payables 

2013 
£m 

(381.1) 

(426.1) 

(0.1) 

(26.6) 

(72.0) 

(905.9) 

(115.5) 

(1,021.4) 

2012 
£m 

(369.7) 

(422.9) 

(0.1) 

(13.3) 

(56.7) 

(862.7) 

(30.4) 

(893.1) 

All amounts included above are unsecured. The total of £26.6m (2012: £13.3m) for other taxes and social security includes £22.0m (2012: £8.1m) for Employer’s 
National Insurance provision in respect of share-based payments. 

Further disclosures relating to current trade and non-current trade payables are set out in note 26. 

102  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   102

22/07/2013   17:12

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

18 PROVISIONS FOR OTHER LIABILITIES AND CHARGES

At 1 May 2012 

Reclassified from accruals 

Utilised 

Released 

Charged to the income statement 

At 30 April 2013 

Construction 
liabilities 
£m 

– 

(16.5) 

– 

6.6 

(13.7) 

(23.6) 

Other 
£m 

– 

(7.3) 

0.7 

1.2 

– 

(5.4) 

Total 
£m 

– 

(23.8) 

0.7 

7.8 

(13.7) 

(29.0) 

Of the total provisions at 30 April 2013, £27.9m are non-current and £1.1m are current. 

a) Construction liabilities 
The Group holds provisions for a best estimate of certain post-completion development obligations in respect of the construction of its portfolio of complex 
mixed-use developments which are expected to be incurred in the ordinary course of business, but which are uncertain in terms of timing and quantum. 

b) Other 
Other provisions include onerous lease provisions for properties leased by the Group and provisions for the Group’s exposure to specific estate liabilities on 
historic sites developed by the Group. 

19 DEFERRED TAX 

The movement on the deferred tax account is as follows:

At 1 May 2012 

Transfer from corporation tax receivable 

(Charged)/credited to the income statement at 24% (note 6) 

 Accelerated 
capital 
allowances 
£m 

0.4 

– 

(0.1) 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 24% to 23% (note 6) 

– 

(Charged)/credited to the income statement in year 

Credited to equity at 24% 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 24% to 23% 

Credited to equity in year (note 6) 

At 30 April 2013 

At 1 May 2011 

Transfer from corporation tax receivable 

(Charged)/credited to the income statement at 26% (note 6) 

(0.1) 

– 

– 

– 

0.3 

0.5 

– 

(0.1) 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 26% to 24% (note 6) 

– 

(Charged)/credited to the income statement in year 

Credited to equity at 26% 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 26% to 24% 

Credited to equity in year (note 6) 

Deferred tax transferred on disposal of subsidiary undertaking 

At 30 April 2012 

(0.1) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

0.4 

 Retirement 
benefit 
obligation 
£m 

Other 
short-term 
timing 
differences 
£m 

– 

– 

(0.2) 

– 

(0.2) 

0.2 

– 

0.2 

– 

– 

– 

(0.1) 

– 

(0.1) 

0.1 

– 

0.1 

– 

– 

24.6 

0.4 

11.1 

(1.1) 

10.0 

22.7 

(1.3) 

21.4 

56.4 

18.4 

0.2 

4.3 

(1.3) 

3.0 

5.0 

(0.8) 

4.2 

(1.2) 

24.6 

 Total
 £m 

25.0 

0.4 

10.8 

(1.1) 

9.7 

22.9 

(1.3) 

21.6 

56.7 

18.9 

0.2 

4.1 

(1.3) 

2.8 

5.1 

(0.8) 

4.3 

(1.2) 

25.0 

Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences under the liability method using a tax rate of 23% (2012: 24.0%). There is no unprovided deferred tax.
 

All of the deferred tax assets were available for offset against deferred tax liabilities and hence the net deferred tax asset at 30 April 2013 was £56.7m (2012: £25.0m).
 

Deferred tax assets of £33.9m (2012: £23.1m) are expected to be recovered after more than one year.
 

The Autumn Statement (December 2012) and the draft Finance (No.2) Bill 2013 included legislation to reduce the main rate of corporation tax to 21% for the
 
financial year commencing 1 April 2014 and 20% for the financial year commencing 1 April 2015. The changes had not been substantively enacted at the balance 
sheet date and, therefore, are not reflected in these financial statements. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   103

22/07/2013   17:12

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013  103 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

19 DEFERRED TAX CONTINUED 

The deferred tax credited to equity during the year was as follows: 

Deferred tax on actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme (note 6) 

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes (note 6) 

Movement in the year 

Cumulative deferred tax credited to equity at 1 May 

Cumulative deferred tax credited to equity at 30 April 

20 SHARE CAPITAL AND SHARE PREMIUM 

The movements on allotted and fully paid share capital for the Company in the year were as follows:

At 1 May 2011 and 30 April 2012 

At 30 April 2013 

At 1 May 2011 and 30 April 2012 

At 30 April 2013 

2013 
£m

0.2

21.4

21.6

11.1

32.7

Share  
capital 
£m 

6.7 

6.7 

2012 
 £m 

 0.1 

 4.2 

 4.3 

 6.8 

 11.1 

Ordinary 
shares
Number (‘000) 

134,857 

134,857 

 Share 
 premium 
£m 

49.3 

49.3 

Each ordinary share of 5p is a voting share in the capital of the Company, is entitled to participate in the profits of the Company and on a winding-up is entitled to 
participate in the assets of the Company. 

At 30 April 2013 there were 3.6m shares held as ‘treasury shares’ (2012: 3.6m). The company has the right to re-issue these shares at a later date. 

At 30 April 2013 there were 0.2m shares held in trust (2012: 0.2m). The market value of these shares at 30 April 2013 was £4.9m (2012: £3m). 

21 RESERVES 

The movement in reserves is set out in the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity on page 89. 

Other reserve 
The other reserve of negative £961.3m (2012: negative £961.3m) arose from the application of merger accounting principles to the financial statements on 
implementation of the capital reorganisation of the Group, incorporating a Scheme of Arrangement, in the year ended 30 April 2005. 

Revaluation reserve 
The revaluation reserve consists of balances in relation to two separate transactions. 

The first element arose following the acquisition on 7 November 2006 of the 50% of the ordinary share capital of St James Group Limited not already owned. A 
revaluation reserve of £20,297,000 was originally created in accordance with IFRS 3 through fair value adjustments to the 50% of the net assets of St James Group 
Limited owned by the Group prior to 7 November 2006. A release of £929,000 in the year (2012: £nil) to retained earnings was recognised as the associated fair 
value adjustments were credited to the income statement. At 30 April 2013 the balance in the revaluation reserve relating to the acquisition of St James Group 
Limited is £3,823,000 (2012: £2,894,000). 

The second element arose in 2010 following the acquisition on 23 July 2009 of the shares owned by Saad Investments Company Limited and the outstanding 
shareholder loans in five joint ventures which became fully owned subsidiaries from this date. A revaluation reserve of £560,000 was created in accordance with 
IFRS 3 through fair value adjustments to the 50% of the net assets of the joint ventures owned by the Group prior to 23 July 2009. Transfers of £304,000 in the year 
(2012: £60,000) to retained earnings were recognised as the associated fair value adjustments were charged to the income statement. At 30 April 2013 the balance 
in the revaluation reserve relating to the acquisition of the five entities that were previously joint ventures with Saad Investments Company Limited is £177,000 
(2012: £481,000). 

Capital redemption reserve 
The capital redemption reserve was created to maintain the capital of the Company following the redemption of the B Shares associated with the Scheme of 
Arrangement created in 2004 which completed on 10 September 2009 with the re-designation of the unissued B shares as ordinary shares. 

Retained earnings 
The Company and the Company’s Employee Benefit Trust acquired none (2012: none) of its own shares through purchases on the London Stock Exchange in the 
year. The total amount to acquire the shares was £nil (2012: £nil) and has been deducted from retained earnings within shareholders’ equity. These shares are held 
as ‘treasury shares’. 

22 DIVIDENDS PER SHARE 

The dividends paid in 2013 were £19.7 million (15 pence per share) (2012: £nil). A further interim dividend of £77.3 million (59 pence per share) has been declared 
for payment on 27 September 2013. These financial statements do not reflect this further interim dividend. 

104  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   104

22/07/2013   17:12

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

23 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES 

The Group has guaranteed road and performance agreements in the ordinary course of business of £15.7m (2012: £14.5m). 

24 OPERATING LEASES – MINIMUM LEASE PAYMENTS 

The total future aggregate minimum lease payments of the Group under non-cancellable operating leases are set out below: 

Amounts due within: 

Within one year 

Between one and five years 

After five years 

25 NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT 

Reconciliation of profit after taxation for the year to cash generated from operations: 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Adjustments for: 

– Taxation 

– Depreciation 

– Profit on sale of investment properties 

– Profit on sale of subsidiary 

– Finance income 

– Finance costs 

– Share of results of joint ventures after tax 

– Non-cash charge in respect of share-based payments 

Changes in working capital: 

– Increase in inventories 

– Increase in trade and other receivables 

– Increase in trade and other payables 

– Decrease in employee benefit obligations 

Cash generated from/(used in) operations 

Reconciliation of net cash flow to net cash/(debt): 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents, including bank overdraft 

Net cash outflow from decrease in borrowings 

Movement in net cash in the year 

Opening net (debt)/cash 

Closing net cash/(debt) 

Net cash/(debt): 

As at 30 April 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Non-current borrowings 

Current borrowings  

Net cash/(debt) 

2013 
£m 

1.5 

3.9 

3.0 

8.4 

2013 
£m 

209.7 

61.0 

3.5 

(3.6) 

– 

(1.5) 

9.6 

1.3 

11.8 

(244.5) 

(12.2) 

154.5 

(0.6) 

189.0 

2013 
£m 

64.1 

38.5 

102.6 

(57.9) 

44.7 

2013 
£m 

66.8 

– 

(22.1) 

44.7 

2012 
£m 

0.1 

1.7 

8.1 

9.9 

2012 
£m 

158.1 

56.7 

2.1 

– 

(30.7) 

(2.4) 

11.8 

2.2 

8.2 

(341.2) 

(23.4) 

50.3 

(0.6) 

(108.9) 

2012 
£m 

(263.6) 

163.7 

(99.9) 

42.0 

(57.9) 

2012 
£m 

2.7 

(12.5) 

(48.1) 

(57.9) 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   105

22/07/2013   17:12

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013  105 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

26 CAPITAL MANAGEMENT, FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT 

The Group finances its operations by a combination of shareholders’ funds, working capital and, where appropriate, borrowings. The Group’s objective when 
managing capital is to maintain an appropriate capital structure in the business to allow management to focus on creating sustainable long-term value for its 
shareholders, with flexibility to take advantage of opportunities as they arise in the short and medium term. This allows the Group to take advantage of prevailing 
market conditions by investing in land and work in progress at the right point in the cycle or delivering returns to shareholders through dividends or share buy 
backs. Last year the Group put in place a long-term strategic plan to see £13 per share returned to shareholders over the next 10 years. This plan, reported in more 
detail in the Trading and Financial Reviews on pages 41 to 51, ensures there is sufficient working capital retained in the business to continue investing selectively in 
new land opportunities as they arise. 

The Group monitors capital levels principally by monitoring net cash/debt levels, cash flow forecasts and return on average capital employed. The Group considers 
capital employed to be net assets adjusted for net cash/debt. Capital employed at 30 April 2013 was £1,277.7m (2012: £1,157.7m). The increase in capital 
employed in the year of £120.0m reflects further investment in land and work in progress during the year. 

The Group’s financial instruments comprise financial assets being: trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents and financial liabilities being: bank loans, trade 
payables, deposits and on account receipts, loans from joint ventures and accruals. Cash and cash equivalents and borrowings are the principal financial 
instruments used to finance the business. The other financial instruments highlighted arise in the ordinary course of business. 

As all of the operations carried out by the Group are in sterling there is no direct currency risk, and therefore the Group’s main financial risks are primarily: 

– liquidity risk – the risk that suitable funding for the Group’s activities may not be available; 

– market interest rate risk – the risk that Group financing activities are adversely affected by fluctuation in market interest rates; and 

– credit risk – the risk that a counterparty will default on their contractual obligations resulting in a loss to the Group. 

Financial instruments: Financial assets 
The Group’s financial assets can be summarised as follows: 

Current 

Trade receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade receivables are non-interest bearing. 

Cash and cash equivalents are short-term deposits held at either floating rates linked to LIBOR or fixed rates. 

Financial instruments: Financial liabilities 
The Group’s financial liabilities can be summarised as follows: 

Current 

Bank loans 

Trade payables 

Deposits and on account contract receipts 

Loans from joint ventures 

Accruals 

Other loans 

Non-current 

Trade payables 

Other loans 

Total financial liabilities 

All amounts included above are unsecured. 

2013 
£m

105.9 

66.8 

172.7 

2013 
£m

(4.7) 

(381.1) 

(426.1) 

(0.1) 

(72.0) 

(17.4) 

(901.4) 

(115.5) 

– 

(115.5) 

(1,016.9) 

2012 
 £m 

105.3 

2.7 

108.0 

2012 
 £m 

(48.1) 

(369.7) 

(422.9) 

(0.1) 

(56.7) 

– 

(897.5) 

(30.4) 

(12.5) 

(42.9) 

(940.4) 

Current bank loans have term expiry dates within twelve months of the balance sheet date and are held at floating interest rates linked to LIBOR. Trade payables 
and other current liabilities are non-interest bearing. 

Other loans represent a loan from the Homes and Communities Agency on which interest is payable based on a proportionate share of the net rental income 
arising from the properties to which the loan relates. This loan was repaid following completion of the sale of 534 HCA funded residential properties on 5 June 
2013 (see note 15). 

The maturity profile of the Group’s non-current financial liabilities, all of which are held at amortised cost, is as follows: 

In more than one year but not more than two years 

In more than two years but not more than five years 

In more than five years 

106  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

2013 
£m

(27.7) 

(87.8) 

– 

(115.5) 

2012 
 £m 

(20.7) 

(22.2) 

– 

(42.9) 

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   106

22/07/2013   17:12

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

The carrying amounts of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities approximate to fair value. 

Current trade receivables and current trade and other payables approximate to their fair value as the transactions which give rise to these balances arise in the 
normal course of trade and, where relevant, with industry standard payment terms and have a short period to maturity (less than one year). 

Non-current trade payables comprise long-term land payables, which are held at their discounted present value (calculated by discounting expected future cash 
flows at prevailing interest rates and yields as appropriate). The discount rate applied reflects the nominal, risk-free pre-tax rate at the balance sheet date, applied 
to the maturity profile of the individual land creditors within the total. At 30 April 2013 a rate of 0.43% was applied (2012: 0.74%). Non-current loans approximate to 
fair value as they are held at variable market interest rates linked to LIBOR. 

Liquidity risk 
This is the risk that suitable funding for the Group’s activities may not be available. Group management addresses this risk through review of rolling cash flow 
forecasts throughout the year to assess and monitor the current and forecast availability of funding, and to ensure sufficient headroom against facility limits and 
compliance with banking covenants. The committed borrowing facilities are set out below. 

The contractual undiscounted maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities, included at their carrying value in the preceding tables, is as follows: 

In less than one year 

In more than one year but not more than two years 

In more than two years but not more than five years 

In more than five years 

2013 
£m

(901.4) 

(27.9) 

(89.0) 

– 

(1,018.3) 

2012 
 £m 

(897.5) 

(21.0) 

(22.5) 

– 

(941.0) 

Market interest rate risk 
The Group’s cash and cash equivalents and bank loans expose the Group to cash flow interest rate risk. 

The Group’s rolling cash flow forecasts incorporate appropriate interest assumptions, and management carefully assesses expected activity levels and associated 
funding requirements in the prevailing and forecast interest rate environment to ensure that this risk is managed. 

If interest rates on the Group’s cash/debt balances had been 50 basis points higher throughout the year ended 30 April 2013, profit after tax for the year would 
have been £26,000 higher (2012: £14,000 lower). This calculation is based on the monthly closing net cash/debt balance throughout the year. A 50 basis point 
increase in interest rate represents management’s assessment of a reasonably possible change for the year ended 30 April 2013. The Group’s loan stock amounts 
to £nil (2012: £9,000) and so no sensitivity analysis has been prepared against this interest bearing financial liability as any impact would not be material. 

Credit risk 
The Group’s exposure to credit risk encompasses the financial assets being: trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents. 

Trade receivables are spread across a wide number of customers, with no significant concentration of credit risk in one area. There has been no impairment of 
trade receivables during the year (2012: £nil), nor are there any provisions held against trade receivables (2012: £nil), and no trade receivables are past their due 
date (2012: £nil). 

The credit risk on cash and cash equivalents is limited because counterparties are leading international banks with long-term A credit-ratings assigned by 
international credit agencies. 

Committed borrowing facilities 
The Group has committed borrowing facilities as follows: 

Revolving credit facility one 

Revolving credit facility two 

2013 

2012 

Available 
£m 

Drawn 
£m 

Undrawn  Termination
date 

 £m 

Available
£m 

Drawn
£m 

Undrawn  Termination 
date 

£m 

275 

250 

525 

– 

– 

– 

May-17 

Apr-18 

275 

250 

525 

200 

250 

450 

10 

25 

35 

Nov-13 

Apr-16 

190 

225 

415 

At 30 April 2013 the total drawn down balance across both facilities was £nil. In addition, at 30 April 2013 there were bank bonds in issue of £0.2m (2012: £4.7m). 

The Group completed the refinancing of its main banking facilities on 24 May 2012, increasing available facilities from £450 million to £525 million, with maturity 
dates extended to May 2017 in the case of revolving credit facility one and April 2017 in the case of revolving credit facility two, a level that is commensurate with 
the capital structure and requirements of the Group. The revolving credit facilities are secured by debentures provided by certain Group holding companies over 
their assets. The facility agreement contains financial covenants, which is normal for such agreements, all of which the Group is in compliance with. 

A one year extension was granted on 8 April 2013 for revolving credit facility two which extended the maturity date on this facility until April 2018, and on 24 May 
2013 for revolving credit facility one, which extended the maturity date on this facility until May 2018. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   107

22/07/2013   17:12

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013  107 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

27 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS 

The Group has entered into the following related party transactions: 

Transactions with Directors 
i)	  During the financial year, Mr A W Pidgley paid £20,156 to Berkeley Homes plc for works carried out at his home under the Group’s own build scheme (2012: 
Mr A W Pidgley £47,771 and Mr S Ellis £143,442). This is a scheme whereby eligible employees may enter into an arrangement, at commercial rates, with the 
Group for the construction or renovation of their own home. There were no balances outstanding at the year end. 

ii)  Mr A W Pidgley, a Director of the Company, contracted to purchase an apartment at Ebury Square, London SW1 on 20 March 2012 from Berkeley Homes (PCL) 

Limited, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, for £6,050,000, (Apartment 1). Mr Pidgley is also a Director of Berkeley Homes (PCL) Limited. 

Approval for this purchase was received from shareholders at the 2012 Annual General Meeting and the purchase then became unconditional. 

Approval is now being sought at this Annual General Meeting for Mr Pidgley to 

a) be released from his contract to purchase the property (Apartment 1) and simultaneously 

b) purchase a different property at Ebury Square from Berkeley Homes (PCL) Limited in lieu of the above property for £10,500,000 (Apartment 2). 

Mr R C Perrins, a Director of the Company, contracted to purchase an apartment at 190 Strand, London WC1 for £2,100,000 on 31 May 2013 from SES Manager 
Limited and SES Nominee Limited, subsidiaries of St Edward Homes Limited, a joint venture vehicle, owned by The Prudential Assurance Company Limited, 
part of the Prudential Group, and The Berkeley Group plc, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company. Mr Perrins is also a Director of St Edward Homes Limited. 

Both the agreement between Berkeley Homes (PCL) Limited and Mr Pidgley for Apartment 2 and the agreement between SES Manager Limited and SES 
Nominee Limited and Mr Perrins are a standard form sale and purchase agreement used by the respective companies on the respective developments, save 
that they are conditional upon the agreement of shareholders. In respect of Mr Pidgley, the agreement in respect of Apartment 2 is conditional on both the 
release of Mr Pidgley from the agreement for the sale and purchase of Apartment 1 and to the sale of Apartment 2 to Mr Pidgley. Under the contractual 
arrangements it is not possible for Mr Pidgley to acquire both Apartment 1 and Apartment 2 nor for him to be released from the agreement for Apartment 1 
unless the agreement to acquire apartment 2 simultaneously becomes unconditional. 

As these transactions are in excess of £100,000, they each constitute a substantial property transaction with a Director of the Company under sections 190 and 
191 of the Companies Act 2006 and are therefore conditional on the approval of shareholders, which will be sought at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting 
on 2 September 2013. 

Transactions with Joint Ventures 
During the financial year there were no transactions with joint ventures other than movements in loans. In 2009 inventory was sold to St Edward Homes Limited for 
£17,411,000 being the share of the transaction attributable to the other venturer in the joint venture. At 30 April 2013 an amount of £21,319,000 was outstanding 
and included within trade receivables (2012: £24,631,000). Loans with joint ventures are disclosed in note 11. 

108  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   108

22/07/2013   17:12

   
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

28 SUBSIDIARIES AND JOINT VENTURES 

(a) Subsidiaries 
At 30 April 2013 the Company had the following principal subsidiary undertakings which have all been consolidated, are registered and operate in England and 
Wales, are all 100% owned and for which 100% of voting rights are held except where stated: 

Residential led mixed-use development 

Berkeley (Carnwath Road) Limited (Isle of Man) 

Berkeley Commercial Developments Limited 

Berkeley First Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Capital) plc (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Carmelite) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (Central London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (East Thames) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Eastern Counties) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Eastern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Fleet) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (Hampshire) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (North East London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Oxford & Chiltern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (PCL) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (South East London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Southern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Three Valleys) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Urban Renaissance) Limited (1) 

(1) Agency companies of Berkeley Homes plc 

(2) Agency companies of St George PLC 

Berkeley Strategic Land Limited 

Berkeley Homes (West London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes Public Limited Company 

Berkeley Partnership Homes Limited (1) 

Berkeley Ryewood Limited 

BH (City Forum) Limited 

St George Battersea Reach Limited (Jersey) 

St George Blackfriars Limited 

St George Central London Limited (2) 

St George North London Limited (2) 

St George PLC 

St George South London Limited (2) 

St George West London Limited (2) 

St James (Grosvenor Dock) Limited 

St James Group Limited 

St James Homes Limited 

The Berkeley Group plc (3) 

The Tower, One St George Wharf Limited 

(3) The Berkeley Group plc is the only direct subsidiary of the Parent Company 

Other activities 

BRP Investments No.1 Limited (Jersey) 

BRP Investments No.2 Limited (Jersey) 

(b) Joint Ventures 
At 30 April 2013 the Group had an interest in the following joint ventures which have been equity accounted to 30 April, have an accounting date of 30 April and 
are registered and operate in England and Wales and which are 50% owned: 

St Edward Homes Limited 

St Edward Homes Partnership 

The St Edward (Strand) Partnership  

Principal activity 

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Residential-led mixed-use development 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V
E
W

I

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

5_P10_BERK_AR13_91-109.indd   109

22/07/2013   17:12

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013  109 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIALS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT TO THE MEMBERS  
OF THE BERKELEY GROUP HOLDINGS PLC 

We have audited the Parent Company financial statements of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc for the year ended 30 April 2013 which comprise 
the Parent Company Balance Sheet and the related notes. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is 
applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

RESPECTIVE RESPONSIBILITIES OF DIRECTORS AND AUDITORS 

As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities set out on pages 82 and 83, the Directors are responsible for the 
preparation of the Parent Company financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit 
and express an opinion on the Parent Company financial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing 
(UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors. 

This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the Company’s members as a body in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 
16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for any other 
purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent 
in writing. 

SCOPE OF THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance that 
the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: whether the 
accounting policies are appropriate to the Parent Company’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and adequately disclosed; the 
reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the Directors; and the overall presentation of the financial statements. In addition, we 
read all the financial and non-financial information in the Annual Report to identify material inconsistencies with the audited financial statements. 
If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report. 

OPINION ON FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

In our opinion the Parent Company financial statements: 

•	  give a true and fair view of the state of the Company’s affairs as at 30 April 2013; 

•	  have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and 

•	  have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

OPINION ON OTHER MATTERS PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES ACT 2006 

In our opinion: 

•	  the part of the Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and 

•	  the information given in the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the Parent Company financial statements are prepared is 

consistent with the Parent Company financial statements. 

MATTERS ON WHICH WE ARE REQUIRED TO REPORT BY EXCEPTION 

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters where the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion: 

•	  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from 

branches not visited by us; or 

•	  the Parent Company financial statements and the part of the Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the accounting 

records and returns; or 

•	  certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 

•	  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit. 

OTHER MATTER 

We have reported separately on the Consolidated Financial Statements of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc for the year ended 30 April 2013. 

John Waters (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 
London 
16 July 2013 

110  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

6_P10_BERK_AR13_110-116.indd   110

22/07/2013   17:16

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
COMPANY BALANCE SHEET
 

As at 30 April 

Fixed assets 

Investments 

Current assets 

Debtors 

Cash at bank and in hand 

Current liabilities 

Creditors (amounts falling due within one year) 

Net current liabilities 

Total assets less current liabilities and net assets 

Capital and reserves 

Called-up share capital 

Share premium account 

Capital redemption reserve 

Profit and loss account 

Total shareholders’ funds 

FINANCIALS 

Notes 

2013 
£m 

2012 
£m 

C5 

C6 

C7 

C8 

C9 

C9 

C9 

C10 

1,395.1

1,395.1

 1,391.3 

 1,391.3 

8.3

0.9

9.2

(680.4) 

(671.2) 

723.9

6.7

49.3

24.5

643.4

723.9

 4.5 

 0.9 

 5.4 

(625.4) 

(620.0) 

 771.3 

 6.7 

 49.3 

 24.5 

 690.8 

 771.3 

The financial statements on pages 111 to 114 were approved by the board of directors on 16 July 2013 and were signed on its behalf by: 

N G Simpkin 
Finance Director 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V

I

E
W

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

6_P10_BERK_AR13_110-116.indd   111

22/07/2013   17:16

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013  111 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIALS 

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

C1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES 

Basis of preparation 
These financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with the Companies Act 2006, where applicable, and 
applicable accounting standards in the United Kingdom (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice) and on the going concern basis. The principal 
accounting policies are set out below and have been applied consistently throughout the year. 

The principal activity of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc (“the Company”) is to act as a holding company. 

The Company has not presented its own profit and loss account as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006. 

The Company has not presented its own statement of total recognised gains and losses for the year as there are no separate gains or losses arising in the year. 

Expenditure 
Expenditure is recognised in respect of goods and services received when supplied in accordance with contractual terms. Provision is made when an obligation 
exists for a future liability in respect of a past event and where the amount of the obligation can be reliably estimated. 

Pensions 
Pension contributions under defined contribution schemes are charged to the income statement as they fall due. 

Investments 
Investments in subsidiary undertakings are included in the balance sheet at cost less provision for any impairment. 

Deferred taxation 
Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date, where transactions or events that 
result in an obligation to pay more tax in the future or a right to pay less tax in the future have occurred at the balance sheet date. 

A net deferred tax asset is recognised as recoverable and therefore recognised only when, on the basis of all available evidence, it can be regarded as more likely 
than not that there will be suitable taxable profits against which to recover carried forward tax losses and from which the future reversal of underlying timing 
differences can be deducted. 

Deferred tax is measured at the average tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which the timing differences are expected to reverse, based on tax 
rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis. 

Share-based payments 
The Company operates three equity-settled, share-based compensation plans. The fair value of the employee services received in exchange for the grant of the 
options is recognised as an expense. The total amount to be expensed over the vesting period is determined by reference to the fair value of the options granted. 
At each balance sheet date, the Company revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest. It recognises the impact of the revision to 
original estimates, if any, in the profit and loss account, with a corresponding adjustment to equity. 

The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium when the options are 
exercised. 

C2 LOSS ON ORDINARY ACTIVITIES BEFORE TAXATION 

Loss on ordinary activities before taxation is stated after charging the following amounts: 

Auditors’ remuneration – audit fees 

2013 
£m

0.1 

No disclosure of other non-audit services has been made as this is included within note 4 of the consolidated financial statements. 

C3 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES 

Staff costs 

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Share-based payments 

2013 
£m

4.5 

10.2 

7.8 

22.5 

2012 
 £m 

0.1 

2012 
 £m 

4.3 

3.2 

6.0 

13.5 

The average monthly number of persons employed by the company during the year was 9, all of whom are Directors (2012: 8). 

Directors 
Details of Directors’ emoluments are set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 61 to 77. 

Pensions 
During the year, the Company participated in one of the Group’s pension schemes, The Berkeley Group plc Group Personal Pension Plan. Further details on this 
scheme are set out in note 5 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. Contributions amounting to £46,800 (2012: £41,000) were paid into the defined contribution 
scheme during the year. 

Share-based payments 
The charge to the income statement in respect of share-based payments in the year, relating to grants of shares; share options and notional shares awarded under 
the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan, the 2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan and the Bonus Plan was £7.8m (2012: £6.0m). Further information on the Company’s share 
incentive schemes are included in the Remuneration Report on pages 61 to 77 as well as note 5 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

112  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

6_P10_BERK_AR13_110-116.indd   112

22/07/2013   17:16

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIALS 

C4 THE BERKELEY GROUP HOLDINGS PLC PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT 

The loss for the year in the Company is £39.4m (2012: loss of £31.5m). 

C5 INVESTMENTS 

Investments in shares of subsidiary undertaking at cost at 1 May 

Additions 

Investment in shares of subsidiary undertaking at cost at 30 April 

2013 
£m

1,391.3 

3.8

1,395.1

2012 
 £m 

1,389.1 

 2.2 

 1,391.3 

Additions in the year relate to company contributions to the Berkeley Group plc for employee services to be settled through the issue of shares on the vesting of
 
the Berkeley Group Holdings plc 2009 Part (a), 2009 Part (b) and 2011 Long Term Incentive Plan awards for the benefit of executive directors of its subsidiaries.
 

The directors believe that the carrying value of the investments is supported by their underlying net assets.
 

Details of principal subsidiaries are given within note 28 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.
 

C6 DEBTORS 

Current 

Deferred tax 

The movements on the deferred tax asset are as follows: 

At 1 May 

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes credited to reserves 

At 30 April 

C7 CREDITORS: AMOUNTS FALLING DUE WITHIN ONE YEAR 

Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings 

Other taxation and social security 

2013 
£m

8.3 

2013 
£m

4.5 

3.8 

8.3 

2013 
£m

(666.1) 

(14.3) 

(680.4) 

2012 
 £m 

4.5 

2012 
 £m 

2.6 

1.9 

4.5 

2012 
 £m 

(620.1) 

(5.3) 

(625.4) 

All amounts included above are unsecured. The interest rate on £601m (2012: £578m) of the balance owed to subsidiary undertakings is 4.0% (2012: 4.0%). At 30 
April 2013 all other amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings are at floating rates linked to LIBOR and have no fixed repayment date. 

C8 CALLED-UP SHARE CAPITAL 

The authorised share capital of the Company in the year was as follows: 

At 30 April 

Ordinary share capital 

Redeemable preference shares of £1 each 

2013 
Number ‘000

2012 
 Number ‘000 

925,000 

50 

925,000 

50 

Each ordinary share of 5p is a voting share in the capital of the Company, is entitled to participate in the profits of the Company and on a winding-up is entitled to 
participate in the assets of the Company. 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

R
E
V

I

E
W

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

6_P10_BERK_AR13_110-116.indd   113

22/07/2013   17:16

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013  113 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIALS 

NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

C8 CALLED-UP SHARE CAPITAL CONTINUED 

The movements on allotted and fully paid share capital for the Company in the year were as follows:

At 1 May 2011 and 30 April 2012 

At 30 April 2013 

At 1 May 2011 and 30 April 2012 

At 30 April 2013 

Ordinary 
shares 
Number ‘000 

134,857 

134,857 

Called-up 
share capital  
£m 

Share 
 premium account 
£m 

6.7 

6.7 

49.3 

49.3 

At 30 April 2013 there were 3.6m shares held as ‘treasury shares’ (2012: 3.6m). The Company has the right to re-issue these shares at a later date. 

At 30 April 2013 there were 0.2m shares held in trust (2012: 0.2m). The market value of these shares at 30 April 2013 was £4.9m (2012: £3.0m). 

The movements in the year are disclosed in note 20 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

C9 RESERVES 

At 1 May 2012 

Loss for the financial year 

Dividends paid 

Credit in respect of employee share schemes 

At 30 April 2013 

Share 
premium account 
£m 

49.3 

– 

– 

– 

49.3 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£m 

24.5 

– 

– 

– 

24.5 

C10 RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENTS IN SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS 

Loss for the financial year 

Dividends paid 

Credit in respect of employee share scheme 

Opening equity shareholders’ funds 

Closing equity shareholders’ funds 

C11 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS 

Profit and 
loss account 
£m 

690.8 

(39.4) 

(19.7) 

11.7 

643.4 

2013 
£m

(39.4) 

(19.7) 

11.7 

(47.4) 

771.3 

723.9 

Total 
£m 

764.6 

(39.4) 

(19.7) 

11.7 

717.2 

2012 
 £m 

(31.5) 

– 

8.2 

(23.3) 

794.6 

771.3 

The Company is exempt under the terms of Financial Reporting Standard 8 “Related party disclosures” from disclosing related party transactions with entities that 
are part of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc or investees of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc. 

114  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

6_P10_BERK_AR13_110-116.indd   114

22/07/2013   17:16

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FIVE YEAR SUMMARY
 

Years ended 30 April 

Income statement 

Revenue 

Operating profit 

Share of post tax results of joint ventures 

Net finance (costs)/income 

Profit before taxation 

Taxation 

Profit after taxation 

Profit attributable to: 

Shareholders 

Non-controlling interest 

Basic earnings per ordinary share 

Statement of financial position 

Capital employed 

Net cash/(debt) 

Net assets 

Non-controlling interest 

Shareholders’ funds 

Net assets per share attributable to shareholders (1) 

Ratios and statistics 

Return on capital employed (2) 

Return on equity after tax (3) 

Return on equity before tax (4) 

Units sold (5) 

FINANCIALS 

2013 
£m 

2012 
£m 

2011 
£m 

2010 
£m 

2009 
£m 

1,372.6 

1,041.1 

742.6 

615.3 

702.2 

280.1 

226.4 

135.7 

106.2 

124.9 

(1.3) 

(8.1) 

270.7 

(61.0) 

209.7 

(2.2) 

(9.4) 

214.8 

(56.7) 

158.1 

2.1 

(1.5) 

(0.2) 

4.4 

(0.9) 

(3.6) 

136.3 

110.4 

120.4 

(41.8) 

94.5 

(30.8) 

(34.3) 

79.6 

86.1 

209.7 

158.5 

– 

(0.4) 

209.7 

158.1 

95.1 

(0.6) 

94.5 

79.7 

(0.1) 

79.6 

86.1 

– 

86.1 

160.0p 

121.0p 

72.1p 

60.0p 

71.3p 

1,277.7 

1,157.7 

44.7 

(57.9) 

1,322.4 

1,099.8 

891.8 

42.0 

933.8 

545.4 

316.9 

862.3 

– 

– 

(4.4) 

(3.7) 

1,322.4 

1,099.8 

1,009p 

839p 

929.4 

709p 

858.6 

637p 

516.5 

284.8 

801.3 

– 

801.3 

615p 

22.9% 

17.3% 

22.4% 

3,712 

21.9% 

15.6% 

21.2% 

3,565 

19.2% 

10.6% 

15.3% 

2,544 

20.1% 

9.6% 

13.3% 

2,201 

20.6% 

11.6% 

16.2% 

1,501 

I

H
G
H
L
I
G
H
T
S

I

B
U
I
L
D
N
G
H
O
M
E
S
F
O
R
E
V
E
R
Y
O
N
E

I

R
U
N
N
N
G
A
S
U
S
T
A
N
A
B
L
E
B
U
S
N
E
S
S

I

I

I

T
R
A
D
N
G
&
F
N
A
N
C
A
L

I

I

(1) Net assets attributable to shareholders divided by the number of shares in issue excluding shares held in treasury and shares held by the 

employee benefit trust. 

(2) Calculated as profit before interest and taxation (including joint venture (loss)/profit before tax) divided by the average net assets adjusted for 

(debt)/cash. 

(3) Calculated as profit after taxation attributable to shareholders as a percentage of the average of opening and closing shareholders’ funds. 

(4) Calculated as profit before taxation attributable to shareholders as a percentage of the average of opening and closing shareholders’ funds. 

(5) The number of units completed and taken to sales in the year excluding joint ventures. 

R
E
V

I

E
W

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

6_P10_BERK_AR13_110-116.indd   115

22/07/2013   17:16

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013  115 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIALS 

FINANCIAL DIARY
 

Annual General Meeting and Interim Management Statement 

Half Year End 

Interim Results Announcement for the six months ending 31 October 2013 

Interim Management Statement 

Year End 

Preliminary Announcement of Results for the year ending 30 April 2014 

Publication of 2014 Annual Report 

2 September 2013 

31 October 2013 

6 December 2013 

March 2014 

30 April 2014 

June 2014 

July 2014 

REGISTERED OFFICE AND ADVISORS
 

REGISTERED OFFICE AND PRINCIPAL PLACE OF BUSINESS 

Berkeley House 
19 Portsmouth Road 
Cobham 
Surrey KT11 1JG 
Registered number: 5172586 

REGISTRARS 

Capita Registrars 
The Registry 
34 Beckenham Road 
Beckenham 
Kent BR3 4TU 
Tel: 0870 162 3100 

CORPORATE BROKER AND FINANCIAL ADVISOR 

UBS Investment Bank 

SHARE PRICE INFORMATION 

The Company’s share capital is listed on the London Stock Exchange.
 
The latest share price is available via the Company’s website at www.berkeleygroup.co.uk
 

SOLICITORS 

Ashurst LLP 
Skadden, Arps, Slate Meager & Flom (UK) LLP 

BANKERS 

Barclays Bank PLC 
Lloyds TSB Bank plc 
Santander UK plc 
Svenska Handelsbanken AB (Publ) 
The Royal Bank of Scotland Plc 

AUDITORS 

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 

116  BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2013 

6_P10_BERK_AR13_110-116.indd   116

22/07/2013   17:16

INSIDE FRONT

SPINE
8.5mm

INSIDE BACK

CONTENTS

Highlights

Financials

About this report

1   Who We Are and What We Do
2   Business Performance 
3   Chairman’s Statement
4   Running a Sustainable Business 
5   Managing Director’s Statement 

86 

Independent Auditors’ report on the 
consolidated financial statements
87 Consolidated income statement 
Consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income
88 Consolidated statement of  

Building Homes for Everyone

financial position

6   Building Homes for Everyone 

Running a Sustainable Business

22   Running a Sustainable Business 

Trading And Financial Review

41   Trading Review 
47  Financial Review 
52  Berkeley’s Principal Operating Risks

Governance

56   Board of Directors
58   Directors’ Report 
61 Remuneration Report 
78  Corporate Governance Report

89 Consolidated statement of changes  

in equity

90 Consolidated cash flow statement
91 Notes to the consolidated financial 

statements

110 Independent Auditors’ report on  
the Company financial statements

111 Company balance sheet
112 Notes to the Company financial 

statements

115 Five year summary 
116 Financial diary, registered office 

and advisors

Welcome to the Annual Report of The
Berkeley Group Holdings plc (“the Berkeley
Group” or “Berkeley”), a publicly owned
company, listed on the London Stock 
Exchange within the FTSE 250. In this
report, we give an overview of Berkeley’s 
performance this year in the Highlights 
section followed by a showcase of our 
portfolio of developments in London and
the South of England in Building Homes for
Everyone, before explaining how we operate
in Running a Sustainable Business and a 
review of the year in our Trading and Financial
Review. Our Governance section and the 
detailed Financials accompanied by a report
from the Group’s auditors, complete the
Annual Report.

This page: Fulham Reach, Hammersmith
Cover: Beaufort Park, Hendon

This image is computer
generated and indicative only.

9597_001_RA_2013_Cover_AW.indd   4-6

SPINE
8.5mm

One Blackfriars 

This image is computer 
generated and indicative only. 

22/07/2013   14:37

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
   
 
   
 
  
  
BACK COVER

SPINE
8.5mm

FRONT COVER

Annual Report 2013

l

B
e
r
k
e
e
y
G
r
o
u
p
A
n
n
u
a
l

R
e
p
o
r
t
2
0
1
2

The Berkeley Group Holdings plc 
Berkeley House 
19 Portsmouth Road 
Cobham 
Surrey KT11 1JG 
UK 

T  +44 (0)1932 868555 
F  +44 (0)1932 868 667 
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk 

Design by Hunter Design 

Printed in England by Crystal 
This report is printed on EBB Chromomat 

9597_001_RA_2013_Cover_AW.indd   1-3

Our vision 
for the future 

SPINE
8.5mm

22/07/2013   14:37